Strata RX Tech Ref Manual

STRATA RX System
Analog + Digital
Portable
Microwave
Receiver
Technical
Manual Part No. 400495-1
Rev. B MAY 2007 Reference Manual
Proprietary Material
Notices
The information and design contained within this manual was
originated by and is the property of Microwave Radio
About This Manual Communications. Microwave Radio Communications reserves
Part number 400495-1 all patent proprietary design, manufacturing, reproduction use,
and sales rights thereto, and to any articles disclosed therein,
Revision B MAY 2007
except to the extent rights are expressly granted to others. The
The information in the manual applies to the Microwave Radio foregoing does not apply to vendor proprietary parts.
Communications (MRC) STRATA RX System.
Microwave Radio Communications has made every effort to
ensure the accuracy of the material contained in this manual at
Copyright the time of printing. As specifications, equipment, and this
The information in this manual may only be reproduced by the manual are subject to change without notice, Microwave Radio
purchaser strictly for its own internal use to the extent required Communications assumes no responsibility or liability
for its use of the product, and shall only be made available to whatsoever for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
purchaser’s employees who need access to this material. No manual or for any decisions based on its use. This manual is
part of this material, nor any copies hereof, shall in any manner supplied for information purposes only and should not be
be disclosed, disseminated, or made available by purchaser or construed as a commitment by Microwave Radio
its employees to any other person, firm, or entity without the Communications.
express prior written consent of Microwave Radio
Communications nor shall the same in any manner be modified Regulatory Status
or published for resale without the express prior written
Microwave Radio Communications is certified to ISO 9001:2000.
authorization of Microwave Radio Communications.
© 2007 Microwave Radio Communications
Microwave Radio Communications
101 Billerica Avenue - Bldg. 6
North Billerica, MA 01862-1256USA
TEL: 800.490.5700
978.671.5700
FAX: 978.671.5800
Printed in U.S.A.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices i

Conventions Symbols Used
Pay special attention to information marked in one of the The following symbols are used on the equipment:
following ways:
Symbol Meaning
WARNING Follow WARNINGS to prevent damage to
the equipment. WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock
CAUTION Follow CAUTIONS closely to prevent WARNING: General Warning. Risk of Danger
personal injury or death.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge. Possible

Damage to Equipment
Note Notes provide additional information to assist you
in using and maintaining the equipment.
Fuse - Identifies fuses or their location.
On-Line Viewing -OR-

Text displayed as blue contains a hypertext link. Click on the
hypertext to jump to that destination. Click on the
blue destination to return. Frame or Chassis Ground - Identifies the frame or
chassis terminal.
Viewing this manual on-line Earth Ground - Identifies the earth Ground Terminal
requires Adobe Acrobat,
version 4.0 or above. Protective Earth Ground - Identifies any terminal
which is intended for connection to an external
Click on this icon to download your conductor for protection against electric shock in
FREE copy of Adobe Acrobat case of a fault, or the terminal on a protective earth
Reader. electrode.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices ii

Warranty Information accordance with MRC specifications, or abuses other than
ordinary use; (2) if the product has been modified by Buyer or
has been repaired or altered outside MRC's repair facility, unless
Product Manufactured by MRC: MRC specifically authorizes such repairs or alterations in each
a. Products manufactured by MRC are warranted against instance; or (3) where MRC serial numbers, warranty data, or
defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years quality assurance decals have been removed or altered.
from date of delivery as evidenced by MRC's packing slip or e. Equipment shipped FOB from Microwave Radio
other transportation receipt (unless otherwise noted). Communications shall become the property of the buyer upon
b. MRC's sole responsibility under this warranty will be to either delivery and receipt from the carrier. Any damage in shipment
repair or replace, at its option, any component which fails during should be handled by the buyer directly with the carrier.
the applicable warranty period because of a defect in material or Immediately request the carrier’s inspection upon evidence of
workmanship, provided Buyer has promptly reported same to damage during shipment. Do not return any Microwave Radio
MRC in writing. All replaced products and parts will become Communications product to the factory until a Return Material
MRC's property. Authorization (RMA) number and shipping instructions have
been provided.
c. MRC will honor the warranty at the repair facility designated
by MRC. It is Buyer's responsibility to return, at its expense, the f. No person, including any dealer, agent or representative of
allegedly defective product to MRC. Buyer must obtain a Return MRC is authorized to assume for MRC any other liability on its
Material Authorization (RMA) number and shipping instructions behalf except as set forth herein. If any payment is due MRC for
from MRC prior to returning any product under warranty. services performed hereunder, it will be subject to the same
Transportation charges for the return of the product to Buyer will payment terms as the original purchase.
be paid by MRC within the United States. For all other locations,
the warranty excludes all costs of shipping, customs clearance, Products Manufactured By Others:
and other related charges. If MRC determines that the product is For products not manufactured by MRC, the original
not defective within the terms of this warranty, Buyer will pay manufacturer's or licensor's warranty will be assigned to Buyer to
MRC all costs of handling, transportation, and repairs at the then the extent permitted by the manufacturer or licensor and is in lieu
prevailing repair rates. of any other warranty, expressed or implied. For warranty
d. All the above warranties are contingent upon proper use of information on a specific product, a written request should be
the product. These warranties will not apply (1) if adjustment, made to MRC.
repair, or product or parts replacement is required because of
accident, unusual physical, electrical or electromagnetic stress, All Products:
neglect, misuse, failure of electric power, environmental controls, THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE
transportation, failure to maintain properly or otherwise in EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices iii

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS, AND LIABILITIES ON
THE PART OF MRC. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS
WARRANTIES STATED HEREIN, MRC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES ON PRODUCTS FURNISHED HEREUNDER,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MRC WILL HAVE NO
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY PARTICULAR APPLICATION
MADE OF ANY EQUIPMENT.
Any description of equipment, whether in writing or made orally
by MRC or its agents, specification sheets, models, bulletins,
drawings, or similar materials used in connection with Buyer's
order are for the sole purpose of identifying the equipment and
will not be construed as an express warranty. Any suggestions
by MRC or its agents regarding use, application or suitability of
the equipment will not be construed as an express warranty. No
warranties may be implied from any course of dealing or usage
of trade. Buyer agrees that the exclusion of all warranties, other
than those expressly provided herein, is reasonable.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices iv

Contents System Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
STRATA RXU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
STRATA RCU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
Notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA ACU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
About This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i STRATA Remote Control Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
Copyright - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Typical System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
Proprietary Material - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i For More Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14
Regulatory Status- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Routine Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
On-Line Viewing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii Overview of Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - 3-1
Symbols Used- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii RXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - - - 3-1
Warranty Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii RCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - - - 3-4
Product Manufactured by MRC: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors- - - - - - 3-6
Products Manufactured By Others:- - - - - - - - - - - - - iii STRATA Remote Control Panel Controls, Indicators,
All Products: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii and Connectors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Preparing for Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Mobile Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
How to Use This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Portable Deployment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8
What This Manual Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Turning Power On and Off - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
How It’s Organized - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Using the STRATA RX Screens- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
For Whom It’s Written - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Monitoring Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Related Documents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Using the Monitor Screens in Ext IF Mode - - - - - 3-12
Ordering documentation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Using the Monitor Screens in Analog Mode - - - - 3-12
Calling for Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 Using Monitor Screens in Digital Mode - - - - - - - 3-12
Supported Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 Monitoring Link Quality (LQ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
Tell Us What You Think! - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 LQ Action Levels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
Product Description- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 What Actions to Take- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
Monitoring Bit Error Ratio - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Monitoring Signal-to-Noise Ratio - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
System Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Changing Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20
RF and Demodulation Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Selecting a Preset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20
Antenna and Power Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
Selecting a Channel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
Mounting and Deployment Options - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
Selecting a Band - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-22
System Integration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
Selecting the IF Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Contents Contents-1

Setting the Monitor Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24 Load and Modify Individual Configuration Pages 5-26
Setting the Squelch Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-25 Modify Individual Preset Settings - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
Setting the COFDM Bandwidth - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-25 Create a New Channel Plan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-35
Controlling DC Power on Coax - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26 Modify a Channel Plan from a File - - - - - - - - - - 5-41
Front Panel Menu Maps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27 Modify a Channel Plan from a STRATA RX
Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings - - - - - - - - - - 3-30 System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47
Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA RX System
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 from a File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
Status LED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Messages on Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Error Codes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 Unpacking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Primary Error Code- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 Initial Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Error Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 Damage in Shipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
Unit ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 Mounting and Cabling- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
Operational Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 Floor/Bulkhead Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
Advanced Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Portable Deployment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - MRC Tripod - - 6-3
Before You Begin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - MRC
STRATA RX System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Tripod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
Configurator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - Non-MRC Tripod
Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 (Option 1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
Graphical User Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - Non-MRC
System Rules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 Tripod (Option 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7
Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - Non-MRC Tripod
Channel Plans - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 (Option 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
Create, Update, Load, and Save Configuration Settings STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - Non-MRC Tri-
and Channel Plans - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 pod (Option 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9
Create New Configuration and Channel Plan - - 5-3 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - QuickSet Tripod
Modify a Configuration and Channel Plan from a Mount (Option 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - Non-MRC
Modify a Configuration and a Channel Plan from a Tripod (Option 6) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11
STRATA RX System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18 Power Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12
Program a Configuration and Channel Plan into a Power Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12
STRATA RX System from a File - - - - - - - - - - 5-23 Power Supply and Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12

Power Cable Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 Band-Specific RF Architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
Additional Powering Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 AGC/IF Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 Switch and IF Interface Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
Audio Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 Monitor and Output Switching- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
Panel Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 Audio Switching - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
Analog Audio Output- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17 Demodulation and Decoding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
Digital Audio Output (AES/EBU) - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19 COFDM Demodulator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
Signal Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20 MPEG Decoder Circuit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
Data Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Distribution, Command and Control - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13
Remote Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Channels & Frequencies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
Radio Programming and Monitoring - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
Wayside Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21 Initial Factory Presets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
Panel Data Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22 US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz Channel Plan - - - - A-6
Multipurpose Data Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23 Glossary - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1
Networking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
Powering Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Configurator Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Checks before power-up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Initial power-up- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Configurator Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Product Modifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Working With the Configurator- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-1
Repair - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 Windows, Tabs, Pages, Buttons, and Menus - - - - C-1
Graphical User Interface Options - - - - - - - - - - - - C-6
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Load and Program Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-7
Supported Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Configurator Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-9
Calling for Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
Main Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-9
Replacement Parts- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 Radio Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-16
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 COFDM Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-18
External Cables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 MPEG Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-19
Mounting Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 FMR Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-23
Theory of Operation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Channel Plan Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-24
Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Monitor Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-27
System Architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1 Front Panel vs. Configurator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-34
RF Front End - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 PC Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-34
Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB)- - - - - - - 9-3 Installing the Configurator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-34
Low Noise Converter (LNC)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 STRATA RX Configuration Utility Troubleshooting- - C-36

Configurator Error Messages- - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-36
Configurator Operational Problems - - - - - - - - - C-39
Decimal Separator Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - - C-42
Configurator Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-42
Link Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-1
Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-1
Analog vs. Digital Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-1
Understanding Link Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-2
Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-2
The LQ Scale - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-2
LQ and Signal Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-3
LQ Action Levels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-3
What Actions to Take - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-4
Technical Background: LQ Factors - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-5
RCL and SNR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-5
FEC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-5
GI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-6
BW - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-6
BER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-7
Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-1

1 Introduction 1.3 What This Manual Covers
This manual covers how to operate and maintain the STRATA
Receiver (RX) System.
1.1 Chapter Overview This manual also covers various configurations of the STRATA
This chapter will introduce you to the Technical Reference RX System. Your RX System may be mounted on a tripod or
Manual - what it covers, how it’s organized, and for whom it’s may be mounted in a vehicle or in an aircraft. Your RX System
written. may also include an optional MRC AC to DC Converter Unit
(ACU).
If your system is mounted in a vehicle or in an aircraft, it may
1.2 How to Use This Manual also include an optional MRC Remote Control Panel. This
This manual was prepared to be viewed on a Windows-based manual provides coverage for all of these various configurations.
PC. A pdf file for this manual is provided on the CD ROM
delivered with each STRATA Receiver (RX) System. The CD
ROM contains pdf files for the Operator’s Guide, the Technical
1.4 How It’s Organized
Reference Manual, and the Quick Reference Cards. Hardcopies The manuals for the STRATA RX System are organized as
of the Operator’s Guide, the Technical Reference Manual, and follows:
the Quick Reference Cards are also delivered with each
STRATA RX System.
Viewing of this manual on-line requires Adobe Acrobat, Version Technical
Chapter Operator’s
4.0 or above. Click on the following icon to download your FREE Reference
Guide
copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader. Manual
Introduction
Product Description
When viewing this manual on-line, text displayed as blue Routine Operation
contains a hypertext link. Click on the blue hypertext link to
jump to that destination. If the destination link is also blue, click Advanced Operation
on the blue destination link to return.
Installation
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-1

Troubleshooting • STRATA RX Quick Reference Card
(part no. 400496-1)
Repair • STRATA RX Remote Control Panel
(part no. 400497-1)
Replacement Parts
Theory of Operation
1.7 Ordering documentation
Any of the above manuals may be ordered by contacting MRC
Channels & Frequencies Customer Service:
Business Hours: Monday - Thursday
Glossary
8:00 AM - 7:00 PM Eastern Time (US)
Configurator Reference (0800 - 1900 hrs US ET)
Link Quality Friday
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Eastern Time (US)
Specifications
(0800 - 1700 hrs US ET)
Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 3)
Note The Technical Reference Manual contains 978-671-5700 (Press 3)
everything in the Operator’s Guide, plus
additional technical content. Fax: 978-671-5800
E-mail customerservice@mrcbroadcast.com
When contacting Customer Service, please have the following
1.5 For Whom It’s Written information available:
This manual is intended for use by qualified installers and • Model number and serial number of the unit. This is
service personnel. Users of this manual should already be located on a label on the bottom of each unit.
familiar with the fundamentals of radio, video, and audio. • Approximate purchase date.
• Radio version, which appears on the RXU or RCU
1.6 Related Documents alphanumeric display at startup.
• STRATA RX Operator’s Guide or
(part no. 400494-1)

• Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the • Approximate purchase date.
STRATA RX Configuration Utility, when the STRATA RX • Radio version, which appears on the RXU or RCU
Configuration Utility is connected to the RXU or RCU. alphanumeric display at startup.
or
1.8 Calling for Service • Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the
MRC Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a STRATA RX Configuration Utility, when the STRATA RX
week. During regular business hours you can reach our expert Configuration Utility is connected to the RXU or RCU.
staff directly.
Business Hours: Monday - Friday 1.9 Supported Repairs
8:00 AM - 7:00PM Eastern Time (US) The STRATA RX System, including the RXU, RCU, and optional
(0800 - 1900 hrs US ET) ACU, is designed to be compact, rugged and reliable.
Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 4) Both the RXU and RCU require specialized test equipment to
calibrate amplitude and frequency characteristics after repair. In
978-671-5700 (Press 4)
addition, sealing the RXU, RCU, and ACU enclosure after repair
Fax: 978-671-5800 requires exacting techniques and special fixtures to ensure its
E-mail: technicalsupport@mrcbroadcast.com weather resistance.
After regular business hours and on weekends and holidays, you Therefore, there are NO supported field repairs to either the
can also reach our expert staff as follows: RXU, RCU, or ACU.
Telephone: 978-671-5929 Return the entire unit for factory repair.

If you attempt field repair you risk damaging your radio. If
Your call will be automatically forwarded to the on-call Technical the radio is under warranty, you may also affect your warranty
Support specialist. coverage.
When contacting Technical Support, please have the following

information available: 1.10 Tell Us What You Think!
• Model number and serial number of the unit. This is We’d appreciate any comments or suggestions you have about
located on a label on the bottom of each unit. this manual. The more feedback we get, the better the manuals
get!

If you’re viewing this manual electronically, it’s easy - just click on
the link below send us an E-mail.
Feedback
Or, you can E-mail our Technical Support team at:

technicalsupport@mrcbroadcast.com
Be sure to tell us what product you’re writing about, and which

manual - the Operator’s Guide, the Quick Reference Card, or the
Technical Reference Manual.

2 Product Description RF and demodulation functions are split between the RXU and
RCU, according to your needs. See the descriptions below and
the configurations illustrated in “Typical System Configurations”
on page 2-6.
2.1 Chapter Overview
2.2.1 RF and Demodulation Options
This chapter provides an overall description of the STRATA RX
System, its components, and its capabilities. Bands The RX System can be ordered configured for any one
of several RF bands. In addition, selected combinations of band
Here are the topics covered: segments are available in a two-band version. MRC is constantly
working to expand and upgrade the capabilities of the RX
System. Consult your Sales Representative or contact the
Topic Page factory for the latest band availability.
System Description 2-1 RF/IF Only If you are integrating the RX System into existing
RF and Demodulation Options 2-1 equipment and need only the RF front end, your RX System will
Antenna and Power Options 2-3 consist of only an RXU. The RXU contains all the RF amplifiers
Mounting and Deployment Options 2-4 and down convertors and provides a 70 MHz IF output for an
external demodulator. The RXU also incorporates switchable IF
System Integration 2-4
filtering with settings optimized for either analog or digital
System Components 2-5 signals.
STRATA RXU 2-5
RF + Analog Demodulation If you need both RF and analog
STRATA RCU 2-5 demodulation functions, you can choose one of two solutions:
STRATA ACU 2-5
• Standalone RXU
STRATA Remote Control Panel 2-6
- The RXU contains the RF front end, switchable IF
Typical System Configurations 2-6
filters, and either an NTSC or PAL demodulator (but
For More Information 2-14 not both).
- The RXU also contains a Low Pass Filter, which can
2.2 System Description be configured to be in or out of the video signal path.
- The RXU provides either NTSC or PAL composite
The STRATA RX System is a highly capable, compact
video output, with 4 channels of analog audio.
microwave receiver system. The RX System is composed of the
Receiver Unit (RXU) and the Receiver Control Unit ( RCU). This - Ideal for minimizing space and weight.
modular architecture allows you the maximum flexibility in • RXU + RCU
configuration, siting, and operation.
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-1

- The RXU contains only the RF front end and - The RCU provides either composite or digital video
switchable IF filters, and provides a 70 MHz IF output. output, with either digital or analog audio or both digital
- The RCU contains either an NTSC or PAL and analog audio.
demodulator (but not both), and provides either NTSC - Used for situations where the RCU and RXU must be
or PAL composite video output with 4 channels of deployed in different locations up to 600 feet (180 m)
analog audio. apart.
- The RCU also contains a Low Pass Filter, which is RF + Analog + Digital Demodulation If you need the capability
always in the video signal path. to switch between analog and digital operation, your RX system
- Used for situations where the RCU and RXU must be will have both an RXU and an RCU.
deployed in different locations up to 600 feet (180 m) • RXU + RCU
apart.
- The RXU contains only the RF front end with
The analog demodulation (NTSC or PAL) is specified when
switchable IF filtering and provides a 70 MHz IF
ordering the RXU or RCU, and cannot be changed in the field.
output.
RF + Digital Demodulation If you need both RF and digital - The RCU contains a COFDM demodulator and can
demodulation functions, you can choose from two solutions: include an MPEG decoder. When equipped with an
• Standalone RXU MPEG decoder, the system also includes a color bar
generator.
- The RXU contains the RF front end with switchable IF
filters, a COFDM demodulator, and can also include - The RCU provides either composite or digital video
an MPEG decoder. output, with either digital or analog audio or both digital
and analog audio.
- The RXU provides either composite or digital video
output, with either digital or analog audio or both digital - The RCU also contains either an NTSC or PAL
and analog audio. demodulator (but not both), and provides either NTSC
or PAL composite video output with 4 channels of
- Ideal for minimizing space and weight.
analog audio.
• RXU + RCU
- The RCU also contains a Low Pass Filter which is
- The RXU contains only the RF front end with always in the video signal path.
switchable IF filtering, and provides a 70 MHz IF - Also allows the RCU and RXU to be deployed in
output. different locations up to 600 feet (180 m) apart.
- The RCU contains a COFDM demodulator and can The analog demodulation (NTSC or PAL) is specified when
include an MPEG decoder. When equipped with an ordering the RCU, and cannot be changed in the field.
MPEG decoder, the system also includes a color bar
generator.

Analog or Digital Demodulation Only If you are integrating This manual covers both the latest and older RX System DC
the RX System into existing equipment and need only the power configurations and requirements. Contact your Sales
demodulation functions, your RX System will contain only an Representative for the latest details.
RCU. The RCU can be equipped with an analog demodulator, a
digital demodulator, or both. When the optional MPEG decoder
is also installed, the system includes a color bar generator. The Note An RCU and RCU are defined as being co-located
when the RXU and RCU are physically separated
RCU also contains a Low Pass Filter, which is always in the
by not greater than 6 feet.
video signal path.
Since the switchable IF filters are in the RXU, this capability is If the RXU and RCU are co-located, power must be supplied to
not part of the demodulator-only system. each unit through their individual power connectors from the
same power source. See Figure 2-1. Do not use DC on coax to
2.2.2 Antenna and Power Options power the RXU and RCU when the units are co-located.
The flexible architecture of the STRATA RX allows a number of
options for both the receive antenna and the power. Figure 2-1: Powering the RXU and RCU Independently
Antenna Options The STRATA RX is fully compatible with

MRC’s families of receive antennas, including: STRATA STRATA
RXU RCU
• OmniPole omnidirectional
Power Power
• Megahorn compact horn Cable Cable
• SectorScan flat panel
• MicroScan parabolic DC Power (+10.5 V to +36 V)
• Ellipse parabolic
Contact your Sales Representative to explore the wide array of
antenna choices available. CAUTION Turn off DC Power on the coax before
Power Options The STRATA RX system runs on DC power connecting any test equipment.
supplied externally, from +10.5 VDC to +36 VDC. Older
configurations were available that operated on DC power If your installation calls for separating the RXU and RCU, the
ranging from +10.5 to +48 VDC. This DC power can be supplied RXU must be powered by DC supplied from the RCU via the
by the optional STRATA ACU power supply, or from another coaxial cable between the units. See Figure 2-2 on page 2-4.
source. The RXU cannot be powered via DC on coax from the RCU.

Figure 2-2: Powering the RXU From the RCU RXU and RCU will usually be mounted in an MRC universal
Coax mounting bracket. The bracket will then be attached to a tripod
STRATA STRATA using a mounting plate and quick release.
RXU RCU The cabling between RXU and RCU is typically left in place, and
up to 600 ft. the power, antenna and audio/video connections are removed at
Power
(180 m) the end of each deployment.
Cable
DC Power (+10.5 V to +36 V)

2.2.4 System Integration
System Communication When the RXU and RCU are
connected, they automatically communicate via signals
Coaxial cable length/voltage limitations exist when powering superimposed on the coaxial cable between the two units. This
from either the RXU or RCU. These limitations are based on allows them to share information on installed hardware, preset
cable size, DC voltage input, cable resistance, and cable length. configurations, current status, and alarms.
A maximum length of 600 feet (180 meters) between the RXU
System Operation Once the RXU and RCU are connected and
and RCU is supported. Contact MRC Technical Support for
communicating, the units work seamlessly together. System
more information on cable requirements.
settings can be selected and modified from the front panel of
Refer to the “Installation” chapter for additional information (part either unit - regardless of which unit holds the hardware being
of the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual only). configured.
System Configuration The STRATA RX offers two levels of
2.2.3 Mounting and Deployment Options system configuration, designed to match the needs of different
The STRATA RX offers a number of options for either mobile or personnel.
portable applications.
For the field operator, the RX System has up to 9 Presets that
For more details on installation of the STRATA RX System in can be selected from the front panel. Each Preset controls key
various applications, refer to the “Installation” chapter (part of the parameters such as modulation, frequency, and audio and video
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual only). settings. Additional settings that are front-panel-controlled
Mobile Installation For mobile applications such as in a vehicle include band, channel, offset, and filtering.
or in an aircraft, the STRATA RX System will usually be mounted For the advanced operator and technical staff, the STRATA RX
in an MRC fixed mounting bracket and is installed in a bulkhead Instrument Configurator Utility (Configurator) software allows
or compartment. The cabling is permanently installed, and complete control of all parameters in the RX System. The
power comes from aircraft or vehicle power. Configurator runs on a Windows PC, and connects to either the
Portable Deployment In portable applications the STRATA RX RXU or the RCU via an RS-232 serial interface.
will be moved from place to place and set up each time. The

Interfacing a PC to either the RXU or RCU in a connected • An analog demodulator, either NTSC or PAL (but not
system gives you complete control of both units. You can read both)
the current settings, program new settings, or return the units to
• A digital demodulator with COFDM and/or MPEG
their factory default settings. The Configurator software
automatically detects what hardware is installed in the system • Both analog and digital demodulators.
and assigns the appropriate configuration to the correct When the RCU is part of the RX System, the RXU cannot also
hardware - regardless of which unit the hardware is installed in. have a demodulator installed.
An RCU is used when:
2.3 System Components • Your usage requires the antenna and the RF front end (in
This section will provide more details about each the the RXU) to be separated from the operating location (the
components of a STRATA RX System: RCU)
• STRATA RXU • You need to be able to switch between analog and digital
• STRATA RCU operation.
• STRATA ACU If your RXU or RCU contains a digital demodulator, it provides

the following additional features:
• STRATA Remote Control Panel
• A wayside data channel, capable of data rates from 1200
to 38,400 baud
2.3.1 STRATA RXU
• A configurable Monitor output, which can provide either
The RXU will always contain an RF front end and switchable IF
70 MHz or ASI output
filters, and in addition may contain one of the following:
• An analog demodulator, either NTSC or PAL (but not 2.3.3 STRATA ACU
both)
For fixed or portable deployment applications, the STRATA RX
• A digital demodulator with COFDM and/or MPEG. System may be powered by the optional AC to DC Converter
When a demodulator (either analog or digital) is installed in the (ACU). The ACU (Figure 2-3 on page 2-6) is offered in several
RXU, no demodulator can be installed in the RCU. different models, each featuring different voltage output levels.
The ACU installs as part of an integrated stack for either tripod or
2.3.2 STRATA RCU fixed applications. The ACU may be used to power only the
The RCU will always contain a demodulator, either analog or RCU when the RXU and RCU are not co-located. In this case,
digital. The options are: the RXU would receive DC power from the RCU superimposed
on the coaxial cable connected between the units.

In standalone RXU or RCU operations, the ACU may be used to Figure 2-4: Standard Remote Control Panel
supply DC power directly to the applicable unit. In the case
where a RXU and a RCU are co-located, both the RXU and RCU
should be powered directly from the ACU in lieu of supplying DC
power from the RCU to the RXU via the coaxial cable connected
between the units.
Figure 2-3: STRATA ACU
The unit allows selection of either the analog or digital operating

mode, channels, and offsets. The unit also allows you to monitor
Link Quality (LQ) when operating in the digital mode and allows
< >
you to monitor the Receive Carrier Level (RCL) when operating
DC
OUTPUT
in either the analog or digital mode.
For additional information, refer to the STRATA RX Remote
Control Panel Operator’s Guide (part no. 400497-1) or contact
2.3.4 STRATA Remote Control Panel your Sales Representative.
For mobile or airborne operations, a STRATA RX Remote
Control Panel is available. See Figure 2-4. Contact your Sales 2.4 Typical System Configurations
Representative for the latest information.
The following figures provide typical configurations for STRATA
This unit is designed to fit a standard aircraft instrument panel RX Systems.
and provides user-friendly controls, combined with well-placed
and easy to read LED displays and color indicators.
The STRATA RX Remote Control Panel provides simplified
receiver operations by allowing the operator to select between
two programmable Presets, typically an analog and a digital
configuration. The Presets are created, modified, and stored in
the STRATA RX System using the Configurator software.

Figure 2-5: RF/IF Only
SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

INPUT OUTPUT
RF from RF
Antenna Front 70 MHz IF
End
MON.
70 MHz IF
AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RX RXU PWR/RS-485
PWR
RS-232
MON. GEN
LOCK

Figure 2-6: RF + Analog Demodulation (RXU only)
SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

INPUT OUTPUT
Analog Composite Video

RF from RF
Demod (NTSC or PAL)
Antenna Front
(NTSC or +
End
PAL) 4 channels
Analog Audio
MON.
70 MHz IF
RX STRATA PWR/RS-485
AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RXU
PWR
RS-232
MON. GEN
LOCK

Figure 2-7: RF + Analog Demodulation (RXU + RCU)
SYSTEM RXU RCU SYSTEM

INPUT OUTPUT
Composite Video
Analog
70 MHz IF (NTSC or PAL)
RF from RF Demod
+
Antenna Front (NTSC or
4 channels
End PAL)
Analog Audio
MON.
MON.
70 MHz IF
70 MHz IF
RX PWR/RS-485 RX STRATA
AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RXU RCU
ON
PWR
OFF
DC
ON COAX
RS-232 POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO
GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

MON. OUTPUT LOCK
LOCK

Figure 2-8: RF + Digital Demodulation (RXU Only)
SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

INPUT OUTPUT
SDI
- or -
ASI (output of
COFDM demod)
Digital - or -
RF from RF Demod
Front External IF
Antenna COFDM - or -
End (+ MPEG) Composite Video
(NTSC or PAL)
MON. +
70 MHz IF
or ASI 4 Channels analog audio
- or -
2 Channels analog audio +
2 Channels digital audio
- or -
4 channels digital audio
RX STRATA PWR/RS-485
AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RXU
PWR
RS-232
MON. GEN
LOCK

Figure 2-9: RF + Digital Demodulation (RXU + RCU)

INPUT OUTPUT
SDI
- or -
ASI (output of
70 MHz IF COFDM demod)
(Digital) Digital - or -
RF from RF Demod External IF
Antenna Front COFDM - or -
End (+ MPEG) Composite Video
(NTSC or PAL)
MON.
MON. +
70 MHz IF
70 MHz IF or ASI 4 Channels analog audio
- or -
2 Channels analog audio +
2 Channels digital audio
- or -
ON
PWR
OFF
DC
ON COAX
GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

MON. OUTPUT LOCK
LOCK

Figure 2-10: RF + Both Analog and Digital Demodulation (RXU + RCU)

INPUT OUTPUT
SDI
- or -
ASI (output of
COFDM demod)
- or -
External IF
Digital Analog - or -
RF from RF 70 MHz IF Demod Composite Video
Demod
Antenna Front COFDM (NTSC or (NTSC or PAL)
End (+ MPEG) PAL)
+
MON. 4 Channels analog audio
MON.
- or -
70 MHz IF 2 Channels analog audio +
70 MHz IF or ASI 2 Channels digital audio
- or -
ON
PWR
OFF
DC
ON COAX
GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

MON. OUTPUT LOCK
LOCK

Figure 2-11: Demodulation Only
SYSTEM RCU SYSTEM

INPUT OUTPUT
Can be equipped with
either analog or digital SDI
- or -
demodulators or both ASI (output of
COFDM demod)
- or -
External IF
- or -
Digital Analog Composite Video
Demod Demod (NTSC or PAL)
70 MHz IF COFDM (NTSC or
(+ MPEG) PAL)
+
4 Channels analog audio
MON.
- or -
70 MHz IF 2 Channels analog audio +
or ASI 2 Channels digital audio
- or -
RX STRATA
RCU
ON
OFF
DC
ON COAX
POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO
SIGNAL MON. GEN

OUTPUT LOCK

2.5 For More Information
More detailed technical information about the STRATA RX can
be found in the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual.
Specific topics are listed below:
Topic Chapter
Changing settings using See Chapter 5, Advanced
the Configurator software Operation
Installation See Chapter 6, Installation
Connections to other See Chapter 6, Installation
equipment
Supported Repairs See Chapter 7, Repair
Repair Parts See Chapter 8, Replacement Parts
Block Diagram See Chapter 9,Theory of Operation

3 Routine Operation Information on settings made with the RX Configurator software
can be found in the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual, in
the Advanced Operation chapter.
For a summary of what settings can be made with the front panel
3.1 Chapter Overview Control Switch and which are made using the Configurator, see
This chapter provides basic information that will enable you to “Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings” on page 3-30.
operate your STRATA RX System.
Here are the topics covered: 3.2 Overview of Controls, Indicators,
Topic Page
and Connectors
Overview of Controls, Indicators, and 3-1 This section describes the controls, indicators, and connectors
Connectors contained on the STRATA RX System.
RXU Controls, Indicators, and 3-1
Connectors 3.2.1 RXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
RCU Controls, Indicators, and 3-4 Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the RXU are
Connectors described below. Topics covered are as follows:
ACU Controls, Indicators, and 3-6
Connectors Topic Page
STRATA Remote Control Panel 3-7 AUDIO Connector 3-2
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors SIGNAL OUTPUT Connector 3-2
Preparing for Operation 3-7 Alphanumeric Display 3-2
Mobile Installation 3-7 Status LED 3-2
Portable Deployment 3-8 PWR Switch 3-3
Turning Power On and Off 3-10 PWR/RS-485 Connector 3-3
Using the STRATA RX Screens 3-11 Control Switch 3-3
Monitoring Operation 3-11 MON. Connector 3-3
Changing Settings 3-20 RF Input Connector 3-3
Front Panel Menu Maps 3-27 RS-232 Connector 3-4
Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings 3-30
Each of these controls, indicators, and connectors are described
in more detail in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators,
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Routine Operation 3-1

and connectors contained on the RXU are shown in Figure 3-1. AUDIO Connector If your RXU is equipped with a Demodulator
For configuration differences in the RXU, see “Typical System (either analog or digital), an AUDIO connector will be installed on
Configurations” on page 2-6. the front panel of the unit. Available on this 10-pin connector are
the analog or digital channels, depending upon how your RXU is
Figure 3-1: RXU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors configured.
AUDIO SIGNAL Alphanumeric If your RXU is not equipped with a Demodulator, this panel will
Connector OUTPUT Display be replaced by a blank panel.
Connector Status PWR
LED Switch SIGNAL OUTPUT Connector The 75-ohm BNC SIGNAL
OUTPUT connector provides the 75 MHz IF output from the unit.
RX STRATA
AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RXU PWR/RS-485
Alphanumeric Display The RXU front panel contains a two-
PWR line by 12-character alphanumeric display. The display operates
in conjunction with the control switch to allow you to monitor
system status and settings and to control system settings.
FRONT VIEW PWR/RS- Status LED Located above the power (PWR) switch on the
Control 485 front panel of the unit is a multi-color status LED. The LED
Switch Connector indications are as follows:
MON. RF Input RS-232
Connector (Not Used) Connector Connector WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a potential
safety hazard. Shut down the STRATA RX
System and disconnect power.
RS-232
MON. GEN
LOCK
LED Color Meaning
REAR VIEW
----- Power is not on in the unit.
Green Power is on and no errors are detected.
The RXU is configured using the Windows PC-based
Amber Minor Alarm - Power is on but some part of the
Configurator software. For details, see “Advanced Operation” on system reports an abnormal condition that might
page 5-1 (part of the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual impair performance.
only).
Red Major Alarm - Power is on but there is a failure
or error that prevents normal operation.

PWR Switch The front panel PWR (power) switch controls Pressing the control switch causes an action to occur.
application of power to the RXU. If your STRATA RX System Command Screens
contains both an RXU and an RCU, both PWR switches must be • If the displayed setting is one of several choices,
set to on for the system to operate. pressing the switch causes the displayed setting to
PWR/RS-485 Connector The front panel-mounted PWR/RS- blink.
485 connector provides the DC power input to the unit. Turning the control switch then displays the other
choices for that setting.
Control Switch Routine operating settings are controlled by the When the desired choice is displayed, pressing the
control switch. Turning the control switch right (cw) or left (ccw) control switch again selects that choice.
displays status and settings and pressing it in makes selections, • If the displayed setting is one of only two choices,
as described below: pressing the switch causes the setting to switch to
Turning the control switch right or left displays status and the other choice (e.g., if A is displayed, pressing the
settings and pressing it in makes selections, as described below: control switch selects B).
Monitor Screens
• Pressing the switch locks the current screen on the
Turning the control switch to the right displays the display (the display will not default to the Main
Monitor screens. These provide current status of the screen).
RX System, including:
• Pressing the switch again unlocks the display, and
• Band and frequency settings allows it to default to the Main screen.
• Signal quality
MON. Connector If your RXU has COFDM/MPEG installed,
• Demodulation settings this rear panel output 75-ohm MON. connector can be
• Error codes. configured (when operating in digital mode) to provide either:
Turning the control switch to the left • 70 MHz IF
displays the Command screens.
These allow control of the RX System, including: • ASI (output of COFDM Demodulator, before MPEG
decoding)
• Selected Preset
• Channel and offset If your RXU is equipped with an analog demodulator, this
connector provides only the 70MHz IF signal.
• IF filter
If your RXU is not equipped with a demodulator, this connector is
present but not functional.
RF Input Connector The type “N” RF input connector provides
the RF input to the unit.

RS-232 Connector The RS-232 DB-9 connector provides page 5-1 (part of the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual
connection to a Windows-based PC when using the Configurator only).
software.
This connector also provides connection to the STRATA Remote Figure 3-2: RCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control Panel when used in mobile or aircraft operations. RS-232 Status
Alphanumeric Control PWR
Connector Display Switch LED Switch
3.2.2 RCU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the RCU are
RX STRATA
described below. Topics covered are as follows: RCU
ON
Topic Page DC
OFF
ON COAX
RS-232 Connector 3-4

Alphanumeric Display 3-5 FRONT VIEW
DC ON COAX
Control Switch 3-5 Switch
Status LED 3-5 (Not
SIGNAL MON. SIGNAL IN
PWR Switch 3-6 Used) AUDIO
OUTPUT Connector Connector Connector
DC ON COAX Switch 3-6 Connector
SIGNAL OUTPUT Connector 3-6
POWER/RS-485 AUDIO
MON. Connector 3-6 SIGNAL IN
SIGNAL IN Connector 3-6

SIGNAL MON. GEN
AUDIO Connector 3-6 OUTPUT LOCK
PWR/RS-485 Connector 3-6

PWR/RS-485 REAR VIEW
Each of these controls, indicators, and connectors are described Connector
on more detail in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators,
and connectors contained on the RCU are shown in Figure 3-2.
RS-232 Connector The RS-232 DB-9 connector provides
For configuration differences in the RCU, see “Typical System
connection to a Windows-based PC when using the Configurator
Configurations” on page 2-6.
software.
The RCU is configured using the Windows PC-based
This connector also provides connection to the STRATA Remote
Configurator software. For details, see “Advanced Operation” on
Control Panel when used in mobile or aircraft operations.

Alphanumeric Display The RXU front panel contains a two- Pressing the control switch causes an action to occur.
line by 12-character alphanumeric display. The display operates Command Screens
in conjunction with the control switch to allow you to monitor • If the displayed setting is one of several choices,
system status and settings and to control system settings. pressing the switch causes the displayed setting to
Control Switch Routine operating settings are controlled by the blink.
control switch. Turning the control switch right (cw) or left (ccw) Turning the control switch then displays the other
choices for that setting.
displays status and settings and pressing it in makes selections,
When the desired choice is displayed, pressing the
as described below:
control switch again selects that choice.
Turning the control switch right or left displays status and • If the displayed setting is one of only two choices,
settings and pressing it in makes selections, as described below: pressing the switch causes the setting to switch to
the other choice (e.g., if A is displayed, pressing the
control switch selects B).
Turning the control switch to the right (CW) displays
Monitor Screens
the Monitor screens. These provide current status of
the RX System, including: • Pressing the switch locks the current screen on the
display (the display will not default to the Main
• Band and frequency settings
screen).
• Signal quality
• Pressing the switch again unlocks the display, and
• Demodulation settings allows it to default to the Main screen.
• Error codes. Status LED Located above the power (PWR) switch on the
Turning the control switch to the left (CCW) front panel of the unit is a multi-color status LED. The LED
displays the Command screens. indications are as follows:
These allow control of the RX System, including:
• Selected Preset
WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a potential
• Channel and offset
safety hazard. Shut down the STRATA RX
• IF filter System and disconnect power.

Both control methods must be enabled for DC power to be
provided from your RCU to the RXU.
LED Color Meaning
SIGNAL OUTPUT Connector The 75-ohm BNC SIGNAL
----- Power is not on in the unit. OUTPUT connector provides SDI, ASI, external IF, or composite
Green Power is on and no errors are detected. video outputs, depending upon your STRATA RX System
Amber Minor Alarm - Power is on but some part of the configuration. See “Typical System Configurations” on page 2-6
system reports an abnormal condition that might for additional information.
impair performance.
MON. Connector If your RCU has COFDM/MPEG installed,
Red Major Alarm - Power is on but there is a failure this rear panel output 75-ohm MON. connector can be
or error that prevents normal operation. configured (when operating in digital mode) to provide either:
PWR Switch The front panel PWR (power) switch controls • 70 MHz IF
application of power to the RXU. If your STRATA RX System
• ASI
contains both an RXU and an RCU, both PWR switches must be
set to on for the system to operate. SIGNAL IN Connector The type “N” SIGNAL IN connector
provides the 70 MHz IF input to the unit.
DC ON COAX Switch DC ON COAX switches are contained on
all configurations of the RCU. If your STRATA RX System AUDIO Connector If your RCU is equipped with a Demodulator
contains both an RXU and an RCU, the system allows you to (either analog or digital), an AUDIO connector will be installed on
power the RXU using DC power supplied from the RCU. This the front panel of the unit. Available on this 10-pin connector are
DC power is superimposed on the coaxial cable between the the analog or digital channels, depending upon how your RXU is
RCU and the RXU. This DC power option is used only when the configured.
RCU and the RXU must be deployed in two separate locations. PWR/RS-485 Connector The front panel-mounted PWR/RS-
When the RCU and RXU are co-located, both units should be 485 connector provides the DC power input to the unit.
powered from the same DC power source. If your STRATA RX
System does not contain an RXU, the DC ON COAX switch 3.2.3 ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
should be set to the OFF position. Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the optional
If your STRATA RX System contains both a RXU and a RCU, the ACU are identified and described below. Topics covered are as
system gives you several ways to control DC power on the follows:
coaxial cable between the RCU and the RXU:
Topic Page
• The DC ON COAX switch on the front panel of the TCU
AC INPUT Connector 3-7
• The DC power option on the Command screen.
POWER Switch 3-7

Power LED 3-7 connector. The indicator is off when the POWER switch is set to
0 (off).
DC OUTPUT Connector 3-7
FUSE 3-7 DC OUTPUT Connector Depending upon the model of your
ACU, the DC OUTPUT connector mounted on the front panel of
Each of the controls, indicators, and connectors are described in the unit provides +15 VDC, +28 VDC, or +48 VDC to provide
more detail in the following paragraphs. Controls, indicators, and power to the RCU and/or RXU.
connectors contained on the ACU are shown in Figure 3-3.
FUSE The fuse provides overload protection for AC input power.
AC INPUT Connector The AC INPUT connector mounted on
the rear panel of the unit provides external AC power to the unit. 3.2.4 STRATA Remote Control Panel Controls,
POWER Switch The front panel POWER switch controls Indicators, and Connectors
application of DC power to the DC OUTPUT connector. When
For controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the
the switch is set to I (on), DC power is present at the DC
optional STRATA Remote Control Panel, refer to the STRATA
OUTPUT connector. When set to 0 (off), no output DC power is
RX Remote Control Panel Operator’s Guide, document number
present at the DC OUTPUT connector.
400497-1.
Figure 3-3: ACU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
3.3 Preparing for Operation
Each installation or deployment will have its own specific tasks
according to the application and the installed hardware.
3.3.1 Mobile Installation

POWER Power AC INPUT For mobile applications such as aircraft or vehicle, the STRATA
DC OUTPUT
Switch LED FUSE Connector RX System is usually mounted in a bulkhead or compartment
Connector
using an MRC Fixed Mounting Bracket (Figure 3-4 on page 3-8).
Mounting brackets are available to mount from one to three
units.
< >
DC
OUTPUT
Power LED The power LED is on when the POWER switch is

set to I (on), indicating DC power is available at the DC OUTPUT

Figure 3-4: Fixed Mounting Bracket Figure 3-5: Fixed Mounting Bracket on Tripod
Fixed Mounting
Bracket
The cabling is permanently installed and power comes from

Quick Release
aircraft (or vehicle) power.
3.3.2 Portable Deployment

For situations where you need to mount a STRATA RX System MRC Tripod
and its Fixed Mounting Bracket to an MRC tripod, MRC also
offers a Quick Release. See Figure 3-5.
For situations where you are mounting to another type of tripod
that doesn’t directly accept the Quick Release, consult with MRC
or your tripod manufacturer. MRC has Dovetail Adapter Plates
that will convert some types of tripods to accept the Quick For portable applications where the STRATA RX System will be
Release. moved from place to place and set up each time, the system will
usually be mounted in an MRC Universal Mounting Bracket. The
Note The versatility of the Quick Release Mount and Universal Mounting Bracket will then be attached to a Quick
mating Dovetail Adapter Plate allows the Dovetail Release for easy mounting on an MRC tripod (Figure 3-6 on
Adapter Plate to be attached to the bottom of the page 3-9).
Universal Mounting Bracket and the Quick Release Universal Mounting Brackets are required for each unit in the
Mount to be attached to a non-MRC tripod, or vice STRATA TX System, i.e., RXU, RCU, and an optional ACU. For
versa. applications using multiple units such as a RXU, RCU, and an
ACU, a Mounting Plate is also used to provide additional
For optional methods of attaching your STRATA stiffness. The Mounting Plate typically remains attached
RX System to a non-MRC tripod, refer to the between the Universal Mounting Bracket and the Quick Release.
“Installation” Chapter on page 6-1 (part of the
STRATA RX System Technical Reference Manual The cabling between RX System units is also typically left in
only). place. The power, antenna and audio/video connections are
usually removed at the end of each deployment.

Figure 3-6: Universal Mounting Bracket on Tripod 1. Attach the RX to the tripod using the Quick Release as
shown in Figure 3-7.
Universal Mounting
Bracket Figure 3-7: Attaching Quick Release to Tripod
Mounting Plate
(for RXU, RCU, ACU)
Quick Release
Quick Release
Tripod
MRC Tripod
(Typical)
2. Attach the antenna to the RXU using the Antenna
Lock Plate, or connect a cable from the RXU to the
antenna. See Figure 3-8 on page 3-10.
3. If you have both an RXU and an RCU, be sure they
For portable deployment situations where you are mounting to are connected to each other via coaxial cable.
another type of tripod that doesn’t directly accept the Quick
Release, consult with MRC or your tripod manufacturer. MRC If you are unsure of the connections, refer to the
has Dovetail Adapter Plates that will convert some types of “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1 (part of the STRATA
tripods to accept the Quick Release. RX System Technical Reference Manual only).
Note The procedures and illustrations contained in the 4. Connect the STRATA RXU (and RCU, if present) to
following paragraph are typical, reflecting use of an DC power of the correct voltage and polarity.
MRC tripod.
If you’re using a STRATA ACU, connect the AC input
Mounting to the Tripod Following are the general steps to to AC power and connect the DC output to the RXU
mount a STRATA RX to an MRC tripod. These steps assume the and RCU.
RX is already assembled into its Bracket, and that the Mounting
Plate and Quick Release are attached.

If you are unsure of the power requirements or the 2. To turn power on, set the PWR switch on the RXU
connections, refer to the “Installation” chapter (part of (and RCU, if present) to the on position ( I ).
the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual only). 3. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:
5. Connect the RXU (or RCU) outputs to your audio and - The LED above the power switch should illuminate
video equipment. and change colors from red, to green, to amber, and
finally green.
Figure 3-8: Complete Tripod Installation
- The display should light up and display a self-test
Antenna Mounting screen, then the version of the installed firmware, and
Bracket RXU RCU finally the Main screen. Some typical screens are
Lock Plate
shown in Figure 3-9. The exact screens will vary
depending on installed hardware.
- The RX System will typically power up using the last
settings in use when power was turned off. If the
STRATA RX does not power up normally, refer to the
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
4. To turn power off, set the PWR switch off ( O ) on the
RXU (and RCU, if present).
Figure 3-9: Typical Power-up Screens

Antenna
Firmware STRATA RXU
Quick Version v 0.X.X
Release
Main Screen Preset#3
MRC
(Analog Mode) Squelch
Tripod
- OR -
3.3.3 Turning Power On and Off
1. Be sure the STRATA system is connected to power Main Screen Preset#3
and the RXU and RCU are connected. (Digital Mode) -38.9 dBm LQ7

3.4 Using the STRATA RX Screens Default to Main Screen If you do not turn or push the control
switch for a period of about 7 seconds, the display will default to
As you use your STRATA RX System, you will interact the Main screen.
extensively with the screens and menus. Following are some
If you turn the control switch within those 7 seconds, you will
points to make this easier.
continue scrolling within that set of screens (Command or
Main Screen The Main screen is your starting point for Monitor).
navigating through the Monitor and Command screens. The
Screen Lock Some Monitor screens display readings that you
Main screen provides the current values of Preset, signal
may wish to monitor continuously, such as the Bit Error Ratio
strength, and Link Quality (LQ).
(BER). To do this, scroll to the Monitor screen you want to
When the STRATA RX System is finished its power-up observe, then press the control switch. This will lock the display
sequence, it will display the Main screen. on that screen, but still allow updating of the displayed data.
Typical Main screens are shown in Figure 3-10. When the display is locked, turning the control switch will have
no effect. Note that the Error Monitor screen cannot be locked.
Figure 3-10: Typical Main Screens To unlock the display, simply press the control switch again. The
display will then switch to the Main screen.
Currently selected Preset
Unit vs.System Control If you’re using a standalone RXU or
Analog Digital
RCU, the menus and options that appear on the display will be
Mode Mode
based on what hardware is installed in that individual unit.
Preset#3 Preset#3 When you connect your RCU and RXU, the two units
-43.2 dBm -43.2 dBm LQ7 automatically detect what hardware is installed in which unit, and
automatically configure the menus and options to match the
installed hardware.
Current signal Current Link Quality The connected RX System then allows you to control the entire
strength system from either front panel, regardless of the hardware
installed in each unit.
Accessing the Main Screen You can access the Main screen
at any time by scrolling to the end of the screens you are viewing 3.5 Monitoring Operation
(either Monitor or Command). Your next click of the control
switch will bring up the Main screen. See ”Front Panel Menu Once the RX is set up and powered, you’ll need to check its
Maps” on page 3-27. configuration and monitor its operation.

The following sections describe how to use the Monitor screens See Figure 3-11 on page 3-14 for an overview of what is
and how to monitor the quality of the microwave link. reported on the Ext IF Monitor screens.
Here are the tasks described: Settings vs. Detected Values vs. Measured Values
In Ext IF operation, all but one of the values in the Monitor
screens are settings that are configured in the RX. The only
Topic Page measured value is the incoming signal strength. There are no
Using the Monitor Screens in Ext IF 3-12 values that are detected and automatically set to match the
Mode parameters of the incoming signal.
Using the Monitor Screens in Analog 3-12
Mode 3.5.2 Using the Monitor Screens in Analog Mode
Using Monitor Screens in Digital 3-12 When the RX is being used to demodulate an analog signal and
Mode provide analog video and audio output, it is in analog mode.
Monitoring Link Quality (LQ) 3-16
Since there is analog demodulation taking place, all the Monitor
LQ Action Levels 3-17 screens will be active. These screens will report on the analog
What Actions to Take 3-17 audio and video demodulation settings.
Monitoring Bit Error Ratio 3-18 See Figure 3-11 on page 3-14 for an overview of what is
Monitoring Signal-to-Noise Ratio 3-19 reported on the analog Monitor screens.
Settings vs. Detected Values vs. Measured Values
3.5.1 Using the Monitor Screens in Ext IF Mode
In Analog operation, all but one of the values in the Monitor
When the RX is being used to receive an RF signal (analog or screens are settings that are configured in the RX. The only
digital) and produce only a 70 MHz IF, it is in External IF (Ext IF) measured value is the incoming signal strength. There are no
mode. values that are detected and automatically set to match the
In Ext IF mode, the Monitor screens that report on demodulation parameters of the incoming signal.
functions are turned off, since there is no demodulation
occurring. The only Monitor screens that will appear are 3.5.3 Using Monitor Screens in Digital Mode
• Main Screen When the RX is being used to demodulate a digital signal and
provide audio and video output, it is in digital mode.
• RF
Since there is digital demodulation taking place, all Monitor
• Input Signal screens will be active. These screens will report the digital audio
• Error Code and video demodulation status.

See Figure 3-12 on page 3-15 for an overview of what is
reported on the digital Monitor screens.
Settings, Detected, Measured, and Derived Values
In digital operation, there are four types of values reported on the
Monitor screens:
• Settings, which are configured in the RX and must be
manually set to match the incoming signal. Settings are:
- Preset
- Band, Channel, Frequency
- COFDM Bandwidth
- IF Filter
- Color Bar
• Detected values, which the RX senses and automatically
configures to match the parameters of the incoming
signal. Detected values are:
- Modulation
- Forward Error Correction (FEC)
- Guard Interval (GI)
- Audio Type
• Measurements are made by the RX on the incoming
signal and consist of:
- Received Carrier Level
• Derived values are calculated by the RX based on
characteristics of the incoming signal. These are:
- Pre- and Post-Viterbi Bit Error Ratio (BER)
- Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
- Link Quality (LQ)

Figure 3-11: Monitor Screens - Ext IF and Analog Modes
Band Channel # Monitor Screens

Frequency (MHz) TURN to
select Ext IF Analog
PUSH to
hold 2GHz C2
RF
2016.500MHz
Operating Mode (External IF or Analog) Digital
IF Filter (Analog/Digital) Ext IF Ext IF Analog FM Input
IF Fil Ana IF Fil Ana Signal
Analog
Common Audio#1 OFF

Audio 1
Audio Channel (ON/OFF) Freq 4.83MHz
Audio Subcarrier Frequency (MHz)

Audio#2 OFF Audio 2
Main Freq 4.83MHz
Screen
Preset # Preset 3 Audio#3 OFF
Audio 3
-43.2 dBm Freq 4.83MHz
Received Signal Level (dBm)
Audio#4 OFF
Freq 4.83MHz
Audio 4
Video Deviation (MHz)

Vid Dev 4MHz
Video
Video Mute Status (ON/OFF) Vid Mute OFF
Aud De-emph Audio

Audio Channel De-Emphasis (ON/OFF)
1:ON 2:ON Emphasis 1/2
Aud De-emph Audio

3:ON 4:ON Emphasis 3/4
Error Code(s) Currently Active
E154 44 Error Code

Figure 3-12: Monitor Screens - Digital Mode
RF Band Channel #
Digital Frequency (MHz) Link Quality Reading
2GHz C2
2016.500MHz LQ7
RF Modulation OFDM Bandwidth
Forward Error Correction Guard Interval
COQPSK 8MHz Input
FE1/2 GI1/8 Signal Pre-Viterbi Bit Error Ratio
PRE 2.0E-7
Post-Viterbi Bit Error Ratio
POST 0.0E-7
BER
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB)
SNR 20.7 dB SNR IF Filter Setting (Analog/Digital)
Main IF Fil Dig
Screen COFDM Status (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Preset 3 COFDM LOCK
-43.2 dBm LQ7 TRANS LOCK
COFDM Transport Stream Status (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Video Out CV
Preset #
Locked: Yes
Video
Received Carrier Level
Aud A Lock Video Output Setting (CV = Composite Video)

Audio A
Analog Mono
Video Data Status (Locked: Yes/No)
Aud B Lock Audio B
Analog Mono Audio Data Status (Lock/Unlock)
Audio Type (Analog/Digital, Stereo/Mono)
ClrBar OFF Color
Bar Color Bar Generator Setting (ON/OFF)
No Errors Error
Error Code(s) Currently Active
Code

3.5.4 Monitoring Link Quality (LQ)
One of the key differences between analog and digital Table 3-1: Link Quality Levels
transmission is how the receiving system reacts to degrading
signal quality. LQ
LInk Quality Description
Reading
Analog Systems In an analog system, degrading signal quality
begins almost immediately to degrade the quality of the 9 Excellent Link Quality - COFDM link is very robust
demodulated video and audio. This provides an early warning with ample ability to correct for degradation.
that signal quality is worsening, long before the video is lost. 8 Very Good Link Quality - COFDM link is robust for
the given environment.
Digital Systems In a digital system, degrading signal quality
initially has no effect on the video and audio. Error-correction 7 Standard Link Quality - COFDM link is acceptable
algorithms correct the errors, and video remains clean. for current environment.
As the signal quality continues to deteriorate, it reaches a point 6 Average Link Quality - COFDM link is average -
when the algorithms cannot correct all the errors. As the errors might improve or worsen.
get worse, the MPEG decoder will be unable to construct an 5 Below Average Link Quality - COFDM link is
image, and video will suddenly be lost. marginal, not dependable.
Operators sometimes refer to this sudden loss of video, with little 4 Poor Link Quality - COFDM link is unstable -
or no apparent warning, as “falling off a cliff”. quality is intermittent and unpredictable.
Link Quality MRC has developed the Link Quality indicator to 1-3 Unsatisfactory Link Quality - COFDM link is not
give you back that ‘early warning’ of an analog system. Link locked.
Quality monitors several key parameters and uses proprietary 0 No signal detected.
algorithms to derive one simple indication of digital signal quality.
Checking Link Quality To check Link Quality, perform the
The Link Quality algorithms report one LQ result, scaled from 0 following steps:
to 9 as shown in Table 3-1.
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected
For additional information on Link Quality, refer to “Link Quality” and powered. See “Preparing for
on page D-1. Operation” on page 3-7.
Link Quality is displayed on the Main
screen.
Preset #3
-43.2 dBm LQ7

To lock this screen on the display, do the following:
Press the control switch to lock the Table 3-2: Actions at Link Quality Levels
display on this screen. Data on
display will continue to update. LQ LInk Quality
Recommended Action
Reading Description
To allow the display to show other screens, do the
following: 9 Excellent Link None required.
Press the control switch to unlock the Quality
display. 8 Very Good Link Most transmissions are made
Quality with LQ of about 7.
Blinking LQ If the LQ reading is blinking on the screen, this 7 Standard Link

indicates that the LQ has dropped to 4 or below, sometime within Quality
the last 2 minutes. The blinking will automatically stop when 2 6 Average Link Begin to take action.
minutes have elapsed with an LQ maintained above 4. Quality
Demodulator-Only Systems The RCL measurement is 5 Below Average Rapidly take additional
performed by the RF circuitry in the RXU. This means if you are Link Quality actions.
using a demodulator-only system (which will have only an RCU), 4 Poor Link Quality Immediately take all available
your LQ readings will not be as accurate, since there will be no actions.
1-3 Unsatisfactory
RCL data. In these conditions, the LQ will typically read 1 - 2
Link Quality
digits above normal.
0 No signal
3.5.5 LQ Action Levels detected.
Table 3-2 describes the actions we recommend at various LQ
levels. These are a good initial guide; you should adjust what
3.5.6 What Actions to Take
you do based on your experience. To improve the LQ, we suggest the following general sequence
of actions. You should develop your own action plan so you’re
prepared in case LQ begins to fall.
1. Optimize RCL.
- No signal: Check channel and frequency - be sure
they match the transmitted signal.
- If RCL is -70 dBm or lower, the signal is weak.

Reposition transmit and receive antennas, or increase
transmit power if possible. Table 3-3: Setting Changes to Improve Link Quality
- An RCL of -40 to -30 dBm is ideal.
Link Capability
- RCL should be less than -25 dBm. Signals stronger
than this can overload the RX and actually make the Least Most
demodulated signal quality worse. Robust Robust
2. Optimize SNR Modulation 64 QAM 16QAM QPSK
- If RCL is OK, but SNR is low (13 -15 dB or less), there FEC 7/8 5/6 3/4 2/3 1/2
may be electrical equipment (or other transmitters) in
GI 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4
the immediate area creating noise.
BW 8 MHz 7 MHz 6 MHz
- Try other channels and offsets to avoid other
transmitters. Note - receiver BW must be manually set to match transmitter.
Highest Lowest
- Isolate noise sources by shutting down other
equipment. Data Transfer Rate
3. Optimize BER Factory Default Settings are highlighted.
- No signal: Check the COFDM BW setting to be sure it
matches the incoming signal. 3.5.7 Monitoring Bit Error Ratio
- Change transmit settings to make the link more robust. One useful indicator of digital signal quality is the BER. BER is
You will achieve a lower data transfer rate as you do calculated as:
so. See Table 3-3.
Error Bits Detected / Total bits received
Note - Factory default settings are highlighted. The STRATA RX reports two BER values:
- The receiver will automatically adjust for the new • BER before Forward Error Correction (FEC) - also called
settings. Pre-Viterbi BER.
Note - Bandwidth (BW) must be manually set to match • BER after FEC - also called Post-Viterbi BER.
the transmitter. These would appear on the BER Monitor screen as follows:
PRE 2.0E-7
POST 0.0E-7

Using BER BER is one of the key components in MRC’s Link Rotate the control switch CW until the
Quality indicator. It also can be used on its own to help alert the display shows the BER Monitor screen. It
operator to deteriorating signal quality. will be similar to this:
As signal quality degrades, the Pre-Viterbi BER will increase.
However, the FEC algorithms will be able to correct these errors, PRE 2.0E-7
and the Post-Viterbi BER will be maintained at 0. Video and POST 0.0E-7
audio will be undisturbed.
As the signal continues to degrade, the Pre-Viterbi BER will Note - The BER will update more slowly
increase as well. At some point the FEC algorithms will reach with low BER readings, faster with high
the limit of errors they can correct. The uncorrected errors will BER readings.
then appear in the Post-Viterbi BER. These Post-Viterbi errors To lock this screen on the display, also do the following:
are a warning sign, even though the video may still be Press the control switch to lock the display
acceptable. on this screen. Data on display will
If the Post-Viterbi BER becomes too large, the MPEG decoder continue to update.
will be unable to make sense of the data, and video will be lost.
To allow the screen to default normally to the Main
Monitoring the BER screen will help you be aware of this signal screen, do the following:
degradation so you can take corrective action.
Press the control switch to unlock the
To access the BER Monitor screen, perform the following steps: display.
Display changes back to Main screen.

Be sure the STRATA RX is connected and
powered. See “Preparing for Operation”
on page 3-7.
3.5.8 Monitoring Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Start at the Main screen. Another useful indicator of digital signal quality is the Signal-to-
Noise Ratio (SNR). SNR is a ratio expressed in dB, and
Preset #3 calculated as:
-43.2 dBm LQ7
Overall Signal Strength / Detected Noise
The SNR Monitor screen provides two pieces of information:
• The current SNR reading
• The current IF filter setting.

To access the SNR Monitor screen, perform the following steps: 3.6 Changing Settings
This section describes how to configure your STRATA RX with
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected different settings, using the front panel control switch.
and powered. See “Preparing for
See ”Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings” on page 3-30 for a
Operation” on page 3-7.
summary of settings that can be made with the front panel
Start at the Main screen. control switch and those that are made using the Configurator
Preset #3 software.
-43.2 dBm Here are the tasks described:
Rotate the control switch CW until the

display shows the SNR Monitor Topic Page
screen. It will be similar to this: Selecting a Preset 3-20
Selecting a Channel 3-21
SNR 20.78 dB Selecting a Band 3-22
IF Filter Dig
Selecting the IF Filter 3-23
Setting the Monitor Output 3-24
To lock this screen on the display, also do the
Setting the Squelch Level 3-25
following:
Setting the COFDM 3-25
Press the control switch to lock the
Bandwidth
display on this screen. Data on
display will continue to update. Controlling DC Power on 3-26
Coax
To allow the screen to default normally to the Main
screen, do the following: 3.6.1 Selecting a Preset
Press the control switch to unlock the The STRATA RX is designed to enable you to control operating
display. settings (through Presets) independently of your selection of
Channel and Frequency.
Display changes back to Main screen. Presets The STRATA RX can be pre-configured with up to 9
Presets. Each Preset contains most of the operating settings
needed to control the RX System, including:

• Digital or analog demodulation Start at the Main screen.
• Digital or analog video and audio outputs Preset Current
Presets must be pre-concerted using the Configurator software. -43.2 dBm Preset
Once defined, the details of a Preset cannot be changed from
the RX front panel.
Rotate the control switch CCW until
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for information on the display reads
configuring Presets using the Configurator software (part of the Chng Preset.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual only). Press the control switch to select
Channels and Frequencies In a standard RX System, Chng Preset. The current Preset
channels and frequencies are controlled separately from setting begins to blink
Presets. Rotate the control switch CCW until
the desired Preset is displayed.
However, if desired the Presets can also be used to specify the
receive frequency. This Frequencies-Locked-to-Presets option is
factory enabled, and must be specified when you order your Press the control switch to select that
radio. The assignment of frequencies to Presets is made using Preset.
the Configurator, and cannot be changed from the RX front
panel. Display changes back to the Main
screen. New Preset should appear.
See ”Configurator Reference” on page C-1 for more information
on this option and how to use it (part of the STRATA RX Preset New
Technical Reference Manual only). -41.7 dBm Preset
Presets and Channels
• When you change a Preset, the last channel chosen stays
in effect.
3.6.2 Selecting a Channel
For each band installed, the STRATA RX can be pre-concerted
• When you change the channel, the last Preset chosen
for operation on any of up to 14 Channels, with (-), center (+),
stays in effect.
and (++) offsets (depending on band).
To select a Preset to use, follow these steps:
The frequencies assigned to each channel must be configured
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected using the Configurator software. Once defined, the frequencies
and powered. See “Preparing for cannot be changed from the front panel.
Operation” on page 3-7”.
For information on configuring channels, see the “Configurator

Reference” on page C-1 (part of the STRATA RX Technical To check that the channel has changed correctly, perform the
Reference Manual only). following steps:
Channels and Presets The selection of the channel is Rotate the control switch CW until the
independent of the Preset chosen: RF Monitor screen is displayed. The
display should indicated the new
• When you change a Preset, the last channel chosen stays
channel.
in effect.
2GHz C2
• When you change the channel, the last Preset chosen
2016.500MHz
stays in effect.
To select which channel to use, follow these steps:
Frequencies Locked to Presets If your RX has the
and powered. See “Preparing for Frequencies Locked to Presets option enabled, the frequency
Operation” on page 3-7”. that is locked to a given Preset may or may not be the same as
one of the channel frequencies. If it is not, the RX will display
Start at the Main screen.
Not On Channel when you reach the Set Channel
Preset #3 Command screen.
-43.2 dBm
3.6.3 Selecting a Band
Rotate the control switch CCW until The STRATA RX can be equipped to operate on two different
the display reads bands, designated as High Band” and Low Band. The
Set Channel. assignment of High Band and Low Band to RF hardware
Press the control switch to select installed in the RX is performed at the factory, as part of the
Set Channel. The current channel manufacturing process. This assignment cannot be changed in
setting begins to blink. the field.
Rotate the control switch CCW until Consult your Sales Representative for the latest band switching
the desired channel and offset are availability.
displayed.
If your RX System is equipped for band switching, the following
Press the control switch to select that section describes its operation.
channel and offset.
Channel Plan and Frequencies When you select a band, the
Display changes back to the Main
RX recalls from memory the channel plan for that band, including
screen. all assignments of frequencies to channels and offsets.

This means that, for example, your RX is set to channel 1 on the
2 GHz band and the band is changed to 7 GHz, the RX will now Note If your RX System contains only an RCU, the front
be set to Channel 1, as defined in the 7GHz Channel Plan. panel menus will still show the Set RF Band
choice. However that choice will not operate and
To select which band to use, perform the following steps: should be ignored.
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected 3.6.4 Selecting the IF Filter

Operation” on page 3-7”.. The STRATA RX provides two switchable IF filters, one
optimized for analog operation and one for digital. These
switchable filters are located with the RF/IF circuitry in the RXU.
Preset #3
-43.2 dBm
Note Be sure to use the correct filter - use the digital
filter during digital operation and the analog setting
Rotate the control switch CCW until for analog operation.
the display reads
Set RF Band. If the filter setting is incorrect the system
Press the control switch to select performance will be degraded.
Set RF Band.
The display will also indicate
High or Low.
To select the IF Filter setting, follow these steps:
Press the control switch to change the
band setting.
Note: This step will only work if your and powered. See “Preparing for
STRATA RX is equipped for band Operation” on page 3-7.
switching.
Display indicates the new setting,
then changes back to the Main screen Preset #3
after the default delay. -43.2 dBm

Rotate the control switch CCW until • RXU
the display reads - Monitor always provides 70 MHz IF
Set IF Filter.
The display will also indicate • RCU
Ana or Dig. - Monitor is switchable between 70 MHz IF and ASI
Press the control switch to change the To select the monitor output, perform the following steps:
filter setting.
Display indicates the new setting, Be sure the STRATA RX is connected

then changes back to the Main screen and powered. See “Preparing for
after the default delay. Operation” on page 3-7”.
Note If your RX System contains only an RCU, the front Preset #3
panel menus will still show the Set IF Filter -43.2 dBm
choice. However that choice will not operate and
should be ignored.
the display reads
3.6.5 Setting the Monitor Output Set Monitor.
If your RXU or RCU includes a COFDM demodulator, the system 70MHz or ASI.
allows you to select the output that appears at the MON.
(monitor) connector. This output can be either:
monitor setting.
• The 70 MHz IF input to the COFDM demodulator
• The ASI output of the COFDM demodulator Display indicates the new setting,
then changes back to the Main screen
If your RXU or RCU does not contain a COFDM demodulator, or after the default delay.
if your RX is operating in analog mode, the MON. connector will
always provide the 70 MHz IF.
If your RX System contains both an RXU and an RCU with
Note If your RX System contains only an analog
demodulator, the front panel menus will still show
COFDM, the MON. connectors on the two units provide the
the Set Monitor choice. However that choice will
following:
not operate and should be ignored.

3.6.6 Setting the Squelch Level Press the control switch to select that
The squelch level sets the weakest signal the radio will attempt squelch level.
to process. If the signal is weaker than this squelch level, the
radio will effectively ignore it and not provide any output at all. Display changes back to the Main
screen.
Squelch only operates in analog mode, or when the output of the
radio is set to provide an IF signal to external equipment (Ext IF
mode).
3.6.7 Setting the COFDM Bandwidth
The COFDM bandwidth must be set to match the bandwidth
To set the squelch level, perform the following steps:
used by the transmitted signal. The RX will not automatically set
this parameter.
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected COFDM bandwidth only operates when the RX is operating in
and powered. See “Preparing for digital mode.
To set the COFDM bandwidth, perform the following steps:
Preset #3
-43.2 dBm Be sure the STRATA RX is connected
Rotate the control switch CCW until Start at the Main screen.
the display reads
Squelch Adj. Preset #3
-43.2 dBm
Press the control switch to select
Squelch Adj. The current squelch
setting begins to blink. Rotate the control switch CCW until
Rotate the control switch CCW until the display reads
the desired Squelch level is displayed. Set OFDM BW.
Press the control switch to select
The choices are: Set OFDM BW. The current
• No Squelch bandwidth setting begins to blink.
• Force Squelch
• -65 to -95 dBm

the desired bandwidth is displayed. CAUTION Turn off DC Power on the coax before
connecting any test equipment.
The choices are:
• 6 MHz
• 7 MHz
Two-step control To prevent inadvertent damage to test
equipment that may be connected to the coaxial cable, there is a
• 8 MHz two-step control for the DC Power applied to the coax.
Press the control switch to select that
bandwidth.
To enable DC Power on the coax, both of the following steps
must be performed:
Display indicates the new setting, • The DC ON COAX switch on the front of the RCU must be
then changes back to the Main screen set to ON.
after the default delay. - AND -
3.6.8 Controlling DC Power on Coax • The system must be configured to have DC on the coax,
using the DC Power Command Screen.
In the STRATA RX System, DC power is always supplied to the
front panel Power connector on the RCU. Command Screen To configure the system for DC on coax
using the Command screen, perform the following steps:
There are then two options for powering the RXU:
Be sure the STRATA RX is connected and
• DC power from the same source as the RCU, supplied via powered. See “Preparing for Operation”
the front panel power connector on the RXU. on page 3-7”.
• DC power supplied via the coax cable from the RCU. Start at the Main Screen.
When the RXU and RCU are in the same location (co-located), Preset #3
the RXU and RCU must always be powered via their DC power -43.2 dBm
connectors from the same DC power supply.
If your application requires the RXU and RCU to be separated, Rotate the control switch CCW until the
the RXU must be powered via the coaxial cable from the RCU. display reads
Refer to the “Installation” chapter (part of the STRATA RX 75 Ohm Coax.
Technical Reference Manual only) for more details.
Power On or Power Off.

power setting.
Display indicates the new setting, then

changes back to the Main screen after the
default delay.
3.7 Front Panel Menu Maps

Following are one-page menu maps to help you navigate
through the settings available using the front panel control
switch.
See Figure 3-13 on page 3-28, for the Monitor Screen Menu
Map. See Figure 3-14 on page 3-29 for the Command Screen
Menu Map, .
Information on settings made with the RX Configurator software
can be found in the STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual, in
the “Advanced Operation” Chapter on page 5-1 chapter.

Figure 3-13: Monitor Screens Menu Map
Monitor Screens
TURN to
select Ext IF Analog Digital
PUSH to
hold 2GHz C2 2GHz C2
2016.500MHz
RF 2016.500MHz LQ7
RF
Digital
Ext IF Ext IF Analog FM Input COQPSK 8MHz Input

IF Fil Ana IF Fil Ana Signal FE1/2 GI1/8 Signal
Analog
Common Audio#1 OFF PRE 2.0E-7

Freq 4.83MHz
Audio 1 BER
POST 0.0E-7
Audio#2 OFF Audio 2 SNR 20.7 dB SNR

Main Freq 4.83MHz IF Fil Dig
Main
Screen Screen
Preset 3 Audio#3 OFF Preset 3 COFDM LOCK
-43.2 dBm Freq 4.83MHz
Audio 3 COFDM
-43.2 dBm LQ7 TRANS LOCK
Audio#4 OFF Video Out CV

Freq 4.83MHz
Audio 4 Video
Locked: Yes
Vid Dev 4MHz Aud A Lock

Video Audio A
Vid Mute OFF Analog Mono
Aud De-emph Audio Aud B Lock Audio B

1:ON 2:ON Emphasis 1/2 Analog Mono
Aud De-emph Audio ClrBar OFF Color

3:ON 4:ON Emphasis 3/4 Bar
E154 44 Error Code No Errors Error

Code

Figure 3-14: Command Screens Menu Map
Command Screens
TURN to
select
Chng Preset Preset 1, 2, PUSH to
Preset
Preset 3 3,...9 activate
Digital
Set Channel Channel 1, 2,
Channel
Channel 2 3,..10 (..14) Ext IF
Analog
Set RF Band Set RF Band
Band
High Band Low Band Common
Set IF Filtr Set IF Filtr

IF Filter Main
IF Fil Ana IF Fil Dig
Screen
Preset 3
Set Monitor Set Monitor -43.2dBm LQ7
Monitor
70 MHz Out ASI Out
Squelch
(Analog / Squelch Adj. No, Force, -65,
Ext IF only) -95 dBm -66,-67..-95 dBm
COFDM
Set OFDM BW 6, 7, 8 MHz
(Digital 8 MHz
only)
75 Ohm Coax Power 75 Ohm Coax Power

DC Power
OFF ON
CAUTION
Turn off DC
Power on Coax
BEFORE connecting
test equipment

3.8 Front Panel vs. Configurator
Settings Table 3-4: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings
The design of the STRATA RX System and the Configurator Set Set
software makes commonly available settings accessible from the Available Using Using
Parameter
RX front panel, and more advanced settings accessible through Settings Control Config-
the Configurator. Switch urator
A summary of which settings can be controlled by each method Presets
is contained in Table 3-4. Preset in use 1, 2, ... 9 3 3
Preset text Any 12 3
alphanumeric
characters
Operation Mode • MPEG CV 3
Out
• ASI Output
• SDI Output
• Ext. IF
• FM CV Out
IF Filter Type • Analog 3 3
• Digital
Squelch level • No Squelch 3 3
• -65, thru -95
dBm
• Force 3
Squelch
Monitor Out • IF 3 3
• ASI

Table 3-4: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued) Table 3-4: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued)
Set Set Set Set

Available Using Using Available Using Using
Parameter Parameter
Settings Control Config- Settings Control Config-
Switch urator Switch urator
Channels Audio Output • Analog 3
Channel & Offset in use • 1, 2, 3 ... 3 • AES/EBU
• -, Center, + Audio A and B Output • 0.0 to 6.0 dB 3
Levels
Channel & Offset Depends on 3
Frequencies band Color Bars • On 3
Bands • Off
RF Band in use • High 3 BISS (Encryption) • On 3
• Low • Off
Frequency segment Depends on Factory
assigned to High and band setting
Low only.
DC Power
DC On Coax • On 3
• Off
COFDM
COFDM Bandwidth • 6 MHz 3 3
• 7 MHz
• 8 MHz
MPEG
NTSC Pedestal • Selected 3
• Not selected
Service Information • Selected 3
• Not selected

Table 3-4: Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings (Continued)
Set Set
Available Using Using
Parameter
Settings Control Config-
Switch urator
FMR
Video Deviation • 3 MHz 3
• 4 MHz
Low Pass Filter • On 3
• Off
Audio Subcarrier • 4830 kHz 3
Frequency • 5200 kHz
• 5800 kHz
• 6200 kHz
• 6800 kHz
• 7020 kHz
• 7500 kHz
• 8065 kHz
• 8300 kHz
• 8590 kHz
Audio Channel Enabled • Selected 3
• Not selected
Deemphasis • Selected 3
• Not selected
Filtered • Selected 3
• Not selected

4 Troubleshooting 4.2 Status LED
Above the power switch on both the RCU and RXU is a multi-
color status LED. The LED indications are described in
4.1 Chapter Overview Table 4-1.
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your STRATA RX

System. WARNING A Major Alarm may also indicate a potential
safety hazard. Shut down the RX System
Here are the topics covered: and disconnect power.
Topic Page
Table 4-1: Status LED Indications
Status LED 4-1
Messages on Display 4-2 LED
Meaning Suggested Action
Error Codes 4-4 Color
Operational Problems 4-10 ----- Power is not on in that unit. Turn on power, as
required.
Green Power is on and no errors None.
are detected.
Amber Minor Alarm - Power is on Check Monitor screens
but some part of the system for error messages or
reports an abnormal Error Codes.
condition that requires Troubleshoot using
attention. Condition might tables in this chapter.
impair performance.
Red Major Alarm - Power is on Turn off unit and
but there is a serious failure disconnect power.
or error that will prevent
normal operation. The
internal processors are not
running.
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Troubleshooting 4-1

4.3 Messages on Display
One of the ways the RX will alert you to problems is by
messages on its front panel display. These are displayed on the
Monitor Screens.
See Table 4-2 for descriptions of the messages and what to do
when they appear.

Table 4-2: Display Messages
Message Meaning Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action

NOT ON The frequency on which Check settings of RX using Monitor screens • Use Configurator to check settings.
the RX is operating does and Command screens. Specifically check Check the Channel Plan to be sure it is
CHANNEL
not match any of the that the correct channel is selected and that correct. Be sure all settings match the
channel frequencies the frequency set for that channel is correct. transmitter settings.
defined in the Channel • If message persists even when
Plan for that band. operating on a frequency that matches
the channel plan, unit may have
suffered internal failure. Call MRC
Technical Support.
RF NOT FOUND The RCU is not detecting In an RCU-only system, this is normal - None.
the RF section of the RXU. there is no RXU to detect. If error persists, RF hardware may have
failed. Call MRC Technical Support.
In a system with both RXU and RCU: • Use Monitor Radio feature of
Check connection between RXU and RCU. Configurator to list errors.
UNLOCKED The RX is unable to lock on • Check Error Code Monitor screen for • Use Configurator to check settings. Be
the incoming signal. errors. sure all settings match the transmitter
COFDM settings.
• Check settings of RX using Monitor
UNLOCKED screens and Command screens. Be
TRANSPORT sure they match transmitter.
Specifically check channel and
UNLOCKED
frequency, COFDM Bandwidth.
VIDEO • Check connection between antenna
UNLOCKED and RXU.
AUDIO • Check connection between RXU and
UNLOCKED RCU.
• Take actions to optimize RCL, SNR,
and BER. See Section 3.5.6 on page 3-
17.

4.4 Error Codes Figure 4-1: Error Code Format
The STRATA RX has an extensive library of diagnostic Error Primary Error Code
Codes to help you pinpoint any problems.
Identifies error condition.
These Error Codes: See Section 4.4.1 on page 4-4.
• Are displayed on the front panel display, in the Error Code
Screen.
• Are reported and displayed by the Configurator, using the
“Monitor Radio” function on the Main Page. E141 45
• Cause the Status LED to glow amber, alerting you to
investigate the problem.
The Error Codes are formatted into 2 groups of characters, as
described in Figure 4-1. Error Status Unit ID
Depends on Identifies unit
error code. reporting error.
See Section 4.4.2 See Section 4.4.3
on page 4-10. on page 4-10.
4.4.1 Primary Error Code

The first group of characters is the Primary Error Code. In most
cases this portion of the Error Code will uniquely identify the
problem.
See Table 4-3 on page 4-5 for descriptions of the error codes
and what to do when they appear.

[
Table 4-3: Primary Error Codes
Error Code Meaning Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action
Status Errors
(Some part of System is reporting an abnormal condition.)
E200 FMR Audio 1 PLL Unlocked • Check to be sure transmitter is • Use Configurator to check FMR
E201 FMR Audio 2 PLL Unlocked operating. If not transmitting, this is settings. Be sure all settings match
normal - there is no audio signal to the transmitter settings.
E202 FMR Audio 3 PLL Unlocked lock onto. • Use Configurator to reprogram all the
E203 FMR Audio 4 PLL Unlocked
• Check FMR settings using Monitor settings in the radio.
screens and Command screens. • If problem persists, possible
Settings must match transmitter hardware failure. Call MRC Technical
settings. Support.
• Contact technical staff.
E204 FMR Audio 1 No Sub-Carrier • Check to be sure transmitter is • Use Monitor Radio function of
Detected operating. If not transmitting, this is Configurator to verify which channel
E205 FMR Audio 2 No Sub-Carrier normal - there is no subcarrier to is not working.
Detected detect. • Check audio configuration using
E206 FMR Audio 3 No Sub-Carrier • Check subcarrier frequencies using Configurator, on the MPEG page.
Detected Monitor Screens. Subcarrier Subcarrier frequencies must match
frequencies must match transmitter. incoming signal.
E207 FMR Audio 4 No Sub-Carrier
Detected • Contact technical staff. • If problem persists, possible
hardware failure. Call MRC Technical
Support.

Table 4-3: Primary Error Codes (Continued)
E120 MPEG Transport Lock Alarm • Check to be sure transmitter is • Use Configurator to check settings.
E121 MPEG Video Lock Alarm operating. If not transmitting, this is Be sure all settings match the
normal - there is no signal to lock transmitter settings.
E122 MPEG PCR Lock Alarm onto. • Use Configurator to reprogram all the
E140 Block Down Converter PLL
• Check connections between antenna settings in the radio.
Unlocked
and RXU. • If problem persists, possible
E141 Low-Noise Down Converter PLL
• Check settings of RX using Monitor hardware failure. Call MRC Technical
Unlocked
Screens and Command Screens. Support.
E142 IF PLL Unlocked Settings must match transmitter
settings.
and BER. See Section 3.5.6 on
page 3-17.
Parameter Errors
(Some internal parameter is outside of allowable limits.)
E150 RXU 2.048 volt reference error • Check for Error Codes related to If errors persist with correct power
E151 RXU 5.5 volt line error power - E156-E158 and E159-E15B. connected, unit has suffered internal
Correct power problem. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
E152 RXU +12 volt line error
E153 RXU -12 volt line error

E154 RXU Receive Signal error • Check to be sure transmitter is If errors persist when tested on service
operating. If not transmitting, this is bench with known good signal source,
normal - there is no signal to receive. unit has suffered internal failure. Call
• Check connections between antenna MRC Technical Support.
and RXU.
• Check connections between RCU
and RXU.
• Check settings of RX using Monitor
screens and Command screens.
Specifically check Channel, Offset,
and Frequency. Settings must match
transmitter settings.
and BER. See Section 3.5.6 on
page 3-17.
E155 RXU Temperature error • Check RX to be sure it is not too If errors persist with proper location and
close to sources of heat. Relocate airflow, and correct power connected,
RX if possible. unit has suffered internal failure. Call
• Check to be sure RX has room MRC Technical Support.
around it for air circulation. Move
objects preventing air flow.

E156 RXU 75 Ohm Coax Current error Note - these errors can only appear in a If errors persist with correct coax
E157 RXU 75 Ohm Coax Voltage error system with RXU + RCU, when powering connections and correct power
the RXU via the coax cable. connected, unit has suffered internal
E158 RXU 75 Ohm Coax Power error failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
• Check connection of coax cable
between RXU and RCU. Be sure
connectors are fully mated and that
cable and connectors are
undamaged.
• Make sure all power cables are
connected properly.
E159 RXU Circular Connector Current • Make sure all power cables are If errors persist with correct power
error connected properly and are not connected, unit has suffered internal
E15A RXU Circular Connector Voltage damaged. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
error • Contact technical staff.
E15B RXU Circular Connector Power
error
E1F0 RCU 2.048 volt reference error • Check for Error Codes related to If errors persist with correct power
E1F1 RCU 5.5 volt line error power - E156-E158 and E159-E15B. connected, unit has suffered internal
Correct power problem. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
E1F2 RCU +12 volt line error
E1F3 RCU -12 volt line error
connected properly.

E1F4 RCU Temperature error • Check RX to be sure it is not too If errors persist with proper location and
close to sources of heat. Relocate airflow, and correct power connected,
RX if possible. unit has suffered internal failure. Call
• Check to be sure RX has room MRC Technical Support.
around it for air circulation. Move
objects preventing air flow.
E1F5 RCU 75 Ohm Coax Current error • Check connection of coax cable If errors persist with correct coax
E1F6 RCU 75 Ohm Coax Voltage error between RXU and RCU. Be sure connections and correct power
connectors are fully mated and that connected, unit has suffered internal
E1F7 RCU 75 Ohm Coax Power error cable and connectors are failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
undamaged.
connected properly.
E1F8 RCU Circular Connector Current • Make sure all power cables are If errors persist with correct power
error connected properly and are not connected, unit has suffered internal
E1F9 RCU Circular Connector Voltage damaged. failure. Call MRC Technical Support.
error • Contact technical staff.
E1FA RCU Circular Connector Power
error

4.4.2 Error Status 4.5 Operational Problems
The significance of the Error Status digit depends on what The information contained on the following pages will assist you
Primary Error Code is being reported. See Table 4-4. in troubleshooting problems that might arise during operation of
your STRATA RX System.
Table 4-4: Error Status Digit
Status Digit Meaning

Status Error (Error Codes E0F0 - E142)
8 There is an error.
Parameter Error (Error Codes E150 - E1FA)
4 Value is too low.
8 Value is too high.
4.4.3 Unit ID
The Unit ID digit identifies which part of the RX System is
reporting a problem. See Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: STRATA Unit ID Digit
Unit ID
1 Transmitter Unit (TXU)
4 Receiver Unit (RXU)
5 Receiver Control Unit (RCU)

Table 4-6: Video Problems
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Operator Action Suggested Technical Staff Action
Video Problems
No video. Problem with video source Check video source and cabling. • Check video source and cabling.
or cabling. • Use the Color Bar Generator function of RX to
look for problems on the receiving end. Turn
on using Configurator, on the MPEG Page.
Channel and frequency Check settings of RX using Use Configurator to check settings. Be sure all
settings of RX do not Monitor screens and Command settings match the transmitter settings.
match settings of screens. Channel, Offset, and
transmitter. Frequency must match
transmitter.
COFDM not locked. Check COFDM Monitor screen. If Use Configurator to check BW settings. Be sure
not locked, check COFDM BW settings match the transmitter settings.
Bandwidth (BW) setting. BW
MUST match with incoming signal.
Video configuration Check video settings using Use Configurator to check video settings. Be
incorrect. Monitor Screens and Command sure all settings match the transmitter settings.
Screens. Settings must match
Poor video quality Link Quality low due to Take actions to boost RCL,
interference or weak improve SNR, and improve BER.
signal. See Section 3.5.6 on page 3-17.
Video configuration Check video settings using Use Configurator to check video settings. Be
incorrect. Monitor Screens and Command sure all settings match the transmitter settings.
Screens. Specifically check Video
Deviation. Settings must match
Video signal level too high Check video signal - should be 1 V p-p.
at transmitter.
If Unit Enabled for Optional BISS Encryption/Decryption
No video. BISS Decryption not Use Configurator to check BISS settings. Be sure
operating. key and/or ID match the transmitter settings.

Table 4-7: Audio Problems
Audio Problems
No audio in one or Problem with audio source Check audio source and cabling.
more channels. or cabling.
One or more audio Check audio setup using Monitor • Use Monitor Radio function of Configurator to
channels turned off. screens. Be sure all channels identify which channel is not working.
you’re using are set to ON. • Check audio configuration using Configurator,
on the MPEG page. Be sure all channels in
use are set to ON.
Audio configuration Check audio setup using Monitor • Use Monitor Radio function of Configurator to
incorrect. screens. Be sure all audio identify which channel is not working.
settings match transmitter. • Check audio configuration using Configurator,
on the MPEG page. Settings must match both
incoming signal and wiring of RX audio
connections.
Audio subcarrier Check subcarrier frequencies • Use Monitor Radio function of Configurator to
frequencies not matched to using Monitor screens. Subcarrier identify which channel is not working.
transmitter settings. frequencies must match • Check audio configuration using Configurator,
transmitter. on the MPEG page. Subcarrier frequencies
must match incoming signal.
Channel and frequency Check settings of RX using Use Configurator to check settings. Be sure all
settings of RX do not match Monitor screens and Command settings match the transmitter settings.
settings of transmitter. screens. Channel, Offset, and
Frequency must match
transmitter.

Table 4-7: Audio Problems (Continued)
Audio is distorted or Audio configuration Check audio setup using Monitor • Use Monitor Radio function of Configurator to
weak. incorrect. screens. Be sure all settings identify which channel is not working.
match transmitter. • Check audio configuration using Configurator,
on the MPEG page. Settings must match both
incoming signal and wiring of RX audio
connections.
DVB-S Audio not being STRATA RX does not Reconfigure link to use other audio format.
received. currently support DVB-S Contact MRC for latest information on availability.
audio.
Linear Audio not being STRATA RX does not Reconfigure link to use other audio format.
received. currently support Linear Contact MRC for latest information on availability.
audio.
If Unit Enabled for Optional BISS Encryption/Decryption
No audio in one or BISS Decryption not Use Configurator to check BISS settings. Be sure
more channels. operating. key and/or ID match the transmitter settings.

Table 4-8: General System Problems
General System Problems
Status LED on RXU or RX is indicating a Minor • Check all Monitor screens on • Error messages: Troubleshoot using
RCU is yellow not Alarm. RX display. Look for Section 4.3 on page 4-2.
green. messages such as “RF NOT • Error Codes: Troubleshoot using Section 4.4
FOUND” or “UNLOCKED”. on page 4-4.
Troubleshoot using
Section 4.3 on page 4-2.
• Check Error Code Screen on
RX display. Troubleshoot
using Section 4.4 on page 4-4.
Status LED on RXU or RX is indicating a Major TURN OFF POWER and call for Call MRC Technical Support.
RCU is red not green. Alarm. service.
Changing settings on RXU and RCU are not • Check connection between If problem persists with correct coax connections,
one unit doesn’t communicating. RXU and RCU. one or both units have suffered internal failure.
change settings on the • Turn power off in both RXU Call MRC Technical Support.
other in a connected and RCU. Then turn power
RXU+RCU system. back on in both.
Can’t find Chroma None. Chroma is automatically None. Chroma is automatically set to match
settings. set to match incoming signal, but incoming signal, but setting does not appear on
setting does not appear on any any Configurator page.
Monitor screen.
Unable to configure or RX does not currently Contact MRC for latest information on availability.
select Service Name support Service Name
and Service Number. functionality.
Unable to manually RX does not currently Contact MRC for latest information on availability.
select PIDs. support selecting PID
values.

Table 4-8: General System Problems (Continued)
PID values reported on RX does not currently Contact MRC for latest information on availability.
Monitor Page of support multi-service
Configurator are selection. PID values
incorrect. shown are fixed.

This page intentionally left blank.

5 Advanced Operation Modify a Configuration and a Channel Plan
from a STRATA RX System
5-18
Program a Configuration and Channel Plan 5-23

into a STRATA RX System from a File
5.1 Chapter Overview Load and Modify Individual Configuration 5-26
This chapter describes how to use the STRATA RX Pages
Configuration Utility (Configurator) software to configure settings Modify Individual Preset Settings 5-31
in the STRATA RX System. This information is provided and Create a New Channel Plan 5-35
intended for use by the technical staff. Modify a Channel Plan from a File 5-41
Settings that are made using the front panel controls are covered Modify a Channel Plan from a STRATA RX 5-47
in the “Routine Operation” Chapter on page 3-1. System
For a summary of what settings can be made with the front panel Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA RX 5-53
control switch and which are made using the Configurator, see System from a File
“Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings” on page 3-30.
Here are the topics covered: 5.2 Before You Begin
Topic Page Before you begin, review the following topics.
Before You Begin 5-1
5.2.1 STRATA RX System
STRATA RX System 5-1
The procedures described in this chapter will assume you
Configurator 5-1
already know how to operate your STRATA RX System. If this is
Settings 5-2 not the case, please review the information presented in the
Graphical User Interface 5-2 following Chapters of this manual:
System Rules 5-2 “Introduction” Chapter on page 1-1
Configurations 5-2 “Product Description” Chapter on page 2-1
Channel Plans 5-3 “Routine Operation” Chapter on page 3-1
Create, Update, Load, and Save Configuration 5-3
Settings and Channel Plans 5.2.2 Configurator
Create New Configuration and Channel Plan 5-3 This chapter also assumes the STRATA RX Configuration Utility
Modify a Configuration and Channel Plan 5-14 software is installed and working on your PC and that you are
from a File familiar with its Tabs, Buttons, Pages, etc. If this is not the case,
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Advanced Operation 5-1

please review the information presented in the “Configurator Your STRATA RX System will consist of one of the following
Reference” Appendix on page C-1. configurations:
• RCU - FMR Only (Analog Only)
5.2.3 Settings
• RCU - FMR, COFDM, and MPEG (Analog/Digital)
Before beginning to create a configuration or program a
configuration into your STRATA RX System, you must define • RCU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
what settings are to be part of the configuration. Please refer to • RXU - FMR Only (Analog Only)
the information presented in the “Configurator Reference”
Appendix on page C-1. • RXU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
• RXU and RCU - RXU FMR Only (Analog Only)
5.2.4 Graphical User Interface • RXU and RCU - RXU COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
The Configurator software provides the ability to use a keyboard
• RXU and RCU - RXU FMR, MPEG, COFDM, and MPEG
and mouse or shortcut (function) keys to select options. For
(Analog/Digital)
information on using the Graphical User Interface (GUI) options,
refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1. The STRATA RX System must be connected to a PC through an
RS-232 link to prepare all configuration and/or channel plan
5.2.5 System Rules settings on-line. The settings can be loaded into the STRATA
RX System or can be saved to a file and can be recalled later.
When configuring your STRATA RX System, the following
system rules must be followed. Please note that STRATA RX System configurations and
channel plans can be created and saved jointly or separately.
• The STRATA RX System must be powered up prior to The procedures required to create or update configurations and/
launching the Configurator software. or channel plans are provided in the following sections.
• The STRATA RX System must be powered up and
connected to the Configurator software to create or 5.2.6 Configurations
modify radio configurations, Presets, and/or files. New configurations may be created from scratch, updated from
• The STRATA RX System must be powered up and must existing files, or may be loaded in from a STRATA RX System
be connected to the Configurator software to create or and modified. Once a configuration is created or modified, it
modify channel plans and/or files. should be saved to a file on your PC.
• The STRATA RX System must be powered up for the Once a configuration is created or modified and saved, you can
Configurator to detect the configuration of your STRATA load the configuration into your STRATA RX System.
RX System.

5.2.7 Channel Plans configuration and channel plan is contained in the following
steps. This procedure is used to create configuration settings
New channel plans may be created from scratch, updated from
regardless of the configuration of your STRATA RX System.
existing files, or may be loaded in from a STRATA RX System
and modified. Once a channel plan is created or modified, it Please note that channel plans may be created only if your
should be saved to a file on your PC. STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
Once a channel plan is created or modified and saved, you can In order to create a new configuration and channel plan, the
load the channel plan into your STRATA RX System. Channel STRATA RX System must be powered up and must be
plans can only be loaded into a STRATA RXU. connected to a PC that has the Configurator software running.
Individual pages and Preset settings must then be selected.
System settings may then be programmed into the STRATA RX
5.3 Create, Update, Load, and Save System and/or saved to a file on your PC.
Configuration Settings and Channel Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for
Plans details of setting choices on each Configurator software tab.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to prepare a
new configuration and channel plan is shown in Figure 5-1.
CAUTION Do not make any configuration changes to
your STRATA RX System while your system Figure 5-1: New Configuration and Channel Plan
is actively receiving.
CHANGE CHANGE
Attempts to program configuration changes CONNECT PRESET CHANNEL
into a STRATA RX System when the system SETTINGS PLAN
is receiving will interrupt broadcast
operations.
The procedures required to create, update, and load STRATA PROGRAM TO

SAVE TO FILE
RADIO
RX System configuration settings and channel plans are
provided in detailed procedures contained in the following
sections.
OR
5.3.1 Create New Configuration and Channel
Plan SAVE TO FILE
The procedure required to create a new STRATA RX System

7. Verify the RCU DC ON COAX switch is set to OFF.
Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX
System is connected to a PC that has the
Configurator software installed. Note If you are unsure of power requirements, refer to
the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1.
When connecting a STRATA RX System that
contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the 8. Set the DC power source to on.
RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to 9. Set the RXU and RCU PWR switches to on ( I ).
either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector. 10. Start the Configurator software by double-clicking the
STRATA RX Configurator icon on your PC desktop.
Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a

standalone RXU or RCU, go to Step 1.
If your STRATA RX System consists of both an

RXU and an RCU, go to Step 5. 11. Observe the STRATA RX Configuration Utility main
page is displayed. See Figure 5-2 .
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the
RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector. Figure 5-2: Main Page
2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your
PC.
Note If you are unsure of power requirements, refer to

3. Set the DC power source to on.

4. Set the RXU/RCU PWR switch to on ( I ) and go to
Step 10.
5. Verify the power cable is properly connected to both
the RXU and the RCU PWR/RS-485 connectors.
6. Connect a coaxial cable between the RXU SIGNAL
OUTPUT connector and the RCU SIGNAL INPUT
connector.

12. Select the General Operations - CONN option button. Figure 5-3: Connection Complete - Typical
Note In the following step, the Chan Plan tab will appear
only if your STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
13. When connection is complete, observe the following:

- The CONN option button label changes to read
DCON. See Figure 5-3 .
- The STRATA RXU and/or STRATA RCU configuration
modules and data fields update to reflect the STRATA
RX System hardware and firmware versions detected.
- The Chan Plan and Monitor tabs appear.
- The Radio, COFDM, MPEG, and FMR tabs become
active (not greyed-out), as applicable to your STRATA
RX System configuration.
- The MONITOR OFF option button label changes to
read MONITOR ON, and, after a short delay, the label 14. Select the Radio tab and observe the Radio page is
changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is displayed. See Figure 5-4.
the Preset name displayed in the pull-down menu
located in the lower right-hand corner of the window. Figure 5-4: Radio Page - Typical
Note By default, settings for Preset 1 will automatically

be loaded into the Configurator software after a
connection has been established.

Notes To change names of individual Presets, perform Note In the following step, Monitor Out - IF and ASI
Step 15 for each Preset Name to be changed. options may be selected for the MPEG CV Out,
ASI Output, or SDI Output operating modes only.
If no Preset names are to be changed, go to Step
16. This option is inactive for the Ext. IF and FM CV
Out operating modes.
15. Select the Preset Name text box and enter custom
text for the Preset (12 alphanumeric characters 18. Select the Monitor Out - IF or ASI radio button for
maximum), as required, and press Enter. each Preset, as required. See Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6: Monitor Out Options - Typical

Note In the following step, only valid Operation Mode
options applicable to the configuration of your
STRATA RX System may be selected.
16. Select the Operation Mode - MPEG CV Out, ASI

Output, FM CV Out, or SDI Output option for each
corresponding Preset Name using the Operation
Mode pull-down menus, as required. See Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5: Operation Mode Pull-Down Menu

19. Select the Filter Type - Digital or Analog radio button
for each Preset, as required. See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7: Filter Type Options - Typical
17. When Operation Mode options have been selected

for each corresponding Preset Name, go to Step 18.

Figure 5-9: COFDM Page - Typical
Note In the following step, Squelch is active (not
greyed-out) for the Ext. IF and FM CV Out
operating modes only.
When the mouse cursor is moved into the Squelch

text box in the following step, a help tip will be
displayed indicating the value range available for
the setting. If no Squelch is desired, enter the
letter N.
20. Select the Squelch text box for each applicable Preset
and enter the value required or enter N. See Figure 5-
8.
Figure 5-8: Squelch Options - Typical

Note In the following step, the Bandwidth option is
active for the MPEG CV Out, ASI Output, or SDI
Output operating modes only.
This option is inactive for the Ext. IF and FM CV

Out operating modes.
Notes In the following steps, the COFDM tab will be 22. Select the bandwidth for each applicable Preset using
active (not greyed out) only if your STRATA RX the Bandwidth pull-down menu. See Figure 5-10.
System contains COFDM and MPEG modules.
Figure 5-10: Bandwidth Pull-Down Menu
If your STRATA RX System does not contain
COFDM and MPEG modules, go to Step 38 .
21. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page
is displayed. See Figure 5-9.

23. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is Figure 5-12: Preset X Check Boxes - Typical
displayed. See Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11: MPEG Page - Typical
Notes If the Preset X - Service Information check box is

not selected in the following step, go to Step 27.
If the Preset X - Service Information check box is

selected in the following step, go to Step 31.
26. Select the Preset X - Service Information check box,

as required.
27. Enter/modify PCR PID: text box data, as required (4
digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
28. Enter/modify DAT PID: text box data, as required (4
Notes In the following steps, MPEG page options are digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
active for the MPEG CV Out and SDI Output
29. Enter/modify Video PID: text box data, as required (4
operating modes only.
digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
Perform Step 24 thru Step 37 for each active 30. Enter/modify Audio - PID A/B: text boxes, as required
Preset, as required. (4 digits maximum). The range is 32 to 8190.
31. Select the Color Bars ON or OFF option using the
24. Select the active Presets - Preset X option button Color Bars pull-down menu. See Figure 5-13.
required.
Figure 5-13: Color Bars Pull-Down Menu
25. Select the Preset X - NTSC Pedestal check box, as
required. See Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-15: Audio Output Pull-Down Menu
Note If your STRATA RX System contains the factory-
enabled BISS encryption option, go to Step 32.
If you do not have either the BISS-1 or BISS-E

option, go to Step 35.
32. Select the Encryption - Type: pull-down menu and 36. Enter the attenuation level in the MPEG Audio Output
select OFF, BISS-1, or BISS-E. See Figure 5-14. Levels - Audio A: text box, as required. The range is
0 to 60 (0.0 to 6.0 dB). See Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-14: BISS Encryption Options
Figure 5-16: MPEG Audio Output Levels Text Boxes -
Typical
Notes If you selected the Encryption - Type: OFF option

in Step 32, go to Step 35. 37. Enter the attenuation level in the MPEG Audio Output
Levels - Audio B: text box, as required. The range is
If you selected the Encryption - Type: BISS-1 0 to 60 (0.0 to 6.0 dB).
option in Step 32, go to Step 33. 38. Select the FMR tab and observe the FMR page is
displayed. See Figure 5-17 on page 5-10.
If you selected the Encryption - Type: BISS-E
option in Step 32, go to Step 34. Notes If your STRATA RX System does not contain an
FMR module, go to Step 46.
33. Observe the Encryption - 1 Key: option is active,
enter your 1 Key: data, as required, and go to Step 35. In the following steps, FMR page options are active
34. Observe the Encryption - E Key: and E ID: options for the FM CV Out operating mode only.
are active, enter your E Key: and E ID: data, as
required, and go to Step 35. Perform Step 39 thru Step 45 for each active
35. Select the Audio - Output: pull-down menu and select Preset, as required.
AES/EBU or Analog. See Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-17: FMR Page - Typical Figure 5-19: LP Filter Option Buttons - Typical
Note In the following steps, the Audio Sub-Carrier -

Enable Channel 1 thru Enable Channel 4 check
boxes must be enabled (checked) for the
corresponding Frequency, Filtered, and
Deemphasis options to be active (not greyed-out).
39. Select the active Presets - Preset X option button 42. Select the active Audio Sub-Carrier - Enable
required. Channel 1 thru Enable Channel 4 check boxes, as
40. Select the Video Deviation - 3 MHz or 4 MHz radio required. See Figure 5-20 on page 5-11.
button, as required. See Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18: Video Deviation Radio Buttons - Typical
41. Select the low pass filter option required using the LP
Filter option button to select ON or OFF, as required.
See Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-20: Audio Sub-Carrier Enable Channel Options
Notes The Chan Plan tab is active only if your STRATA
RX System contains an RXU. If your system does
not contain an RXU, go to Step 51.
In the following step, when the Chan Plan tab is

selected, the 2 GHz Band channel plan will be
displayed as the default channel plan.
46. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
page is displayed. See Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21: Channel Plan Page - Typical
43. Select each active Audio Sub-Carrier - Enable

Channel X frequency pull-down menu and select the
sub-carrier frequency, as required.
44. Select each active Audio Sub-Carrier - Enable
Channel X - Filtered check box, as required.
45. Select each active Audio Sub-Carrier - Enable 47. Select the Channel 1 thru Channel 10 - Offset -.
Channel X - Deemphasis check box, as required. Center, and Offset + text boxes and enter channel
plan frequencies for each channel, as required. See
Figure 5-22 on page 5-12. The value ranges are
1990.000 to 2500.000.

Figure 5-22: 2 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical 50. Select the Channel 1 thru Channel 14 - Offset -.
Center, and Offset + text boxes and enter channel
plan frequencies for each channel, as required. The
value ranges are 6400.000 to 7200.000.
Notes To load your new configuration settings and

channel plan into your STRATA RX System, go to
Step 51.
To save your new configuration settings and

channel plan to a file on your PC, go to Step 53.
To exit this procedure, go to Step 57.
48. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected 51. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
Band pull-down menu and select the High Band displayed. See Figure 5-24.
(7 GHz) option.
49. Observe the 7 GHz Band channel plan is displayed. Figure 5-24: Main Page - Typical
See Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23: 7 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical

52. Select the Radio Operations - PROG option button Figure 5-26: General Operations - SAVE option Button
(See Figure 5-25) and observe the following
indications:
- The Radio Operations - PROG option button is
surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during
programming.
- ADVISORY: status messages are displayed during
programming.
- Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
message area during programming.
- All Configurator tabs are inactive during programming.
- The ADVISORY: message area displays Figure 5-27: Save an Instrument Configuration File -
Programming Radio Has Completed... when Typical
programming is complete.
- All Configurator tabs are active when programming is
complete.
Figure 5-25: Radio Operations - PROG Option Button
53. Select the General Operations - SAVE option button.

See Figure 5-26.
54. Observe the Save an Instrument Configuration File
window is displayed. See Figure 5-27.
55. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box.
56. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save an
Instrument Configuration File window is no longer
displayed.

57. Select the General Operations - DCON option button A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify a
and observe the DCON option button label changes to configuration and channel in a file on your PC is shown in Figure
read CONN. 5-28.
58. Close the STRATA RX Configuration Utility window.
59. Disconnect the RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU Figure 5-28: Modify Configuration and Channel Plan from a
RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your File
PC. LOAD
CHANGE
CONFIGURATION
60. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off CONNECT PRESET
AND CHANNEL
SETTINGS
( O ). PLAN FROM FILE
61. Set the power source to off.
5.3.2 Modify a Configuration and Channel Plan CHANGE

PROGRAM TO
CHANNEL SAVE TO FILE
from a File PLAN
RADIO
The procedure required to modify a STRATA RX System

configuration and channel plan in a file on your PC is contained OR
in the following steps.
Please note that channel plans may be modified only if your SAVE TO FILE
STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
In order to modify a system configuration and channel plan
contained in a file on your PC, the STRATA RX System must be
powered up and must be connected to a PC that has the Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX
Configurator software running. System is connected to a PC that has the
Configurator software installed.
The file must then be loaded into your STRATA RX System and
individual pages and Preset settings are selected and changed, When connecting a STRATA RX System that
as required. System settings may then be programmed into the contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
radio and/or saved to a file on your PC. RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
details of setting choices on each STRATA RX System
Configurator software tab.

.

RXU and an RCU, go to Step 5.
11. Observe the STRATA RX Configuration Utility main
1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the page is displayed. See Figure 5-2 .
RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector.
2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU Figure 5-29: Main Page
PC.


Step 10.
connector.
12. Select the General Operations - CONN option button.

8. Set the DC power source to on. only if your STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
9. Set the RXU and RCU PWR switches to on ( I ).
10. Start the Configurator software by double-clicking the

- The CONN option button label changes to read 14. Select the General Operations - LOAD option button
DCON. See Figure 5-30 . and observe the Load an Instrument Configuration
- The STRATA RXU and/or STRATA RCU configuration File window is displayed. See Figure 5-31.
RX System hardware and firmware versions detected. Figure 5-31: Load an Instrument Configuration File Window
- Typical
read MONITOR ON, and, after a short delay, the label
changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is
located in the lower right-hand corner of the window.

Figure 5-30: Connection Complete - Typical 15. Navigate to the file required in the Load an
Instrument Configuration File window and select it.
16. Select the Open option button.
17. Select each tab and make your choices for settings on
that page.
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on

page C-1 for details of choices on each page.

Notes To load your new configuration settings and surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during
channel plan into your STRATA RX System, programming.
perform Step 18 and Step 19.
programming.
To save your new configuration settings and
channel plan to a file on your PC, perform Step 20 - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
thru Step 23. message area during programming.
To exit this procedure, go to Step 24. - The ADVISORY: message area indicates
Programming Radio Has Completed... when
18. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is programming is complete.
Figure 5-32: Main Page - Typical complete.

See Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34: General Operations - SAVE option Button
19. Select the Radio Operations - PROG option button

indications:

21. Observe the Save an Instrument Configuration File 27. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off
window is displayed. See Figure 5-35. ( O ).
Figure 5-35: Save an Instrument Configuration File -
Typical 5.3.3 Modify a Configuration and a Channel Plan
from a STRATA RX System
If the existing configuration and channel plan programmed into
your STRATA RX System requires changes, you can load the
configuration and channel plan into the Configurator software
and modify it.
Please note that channel plans may be modified only if your
STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
In order to modify the STRATA RX System configuration and
channel plan, the STRATA RX System must be powered up and
must be connected to a PC which has the Configurator software
running. Individual pages, Preset settings, and the channel plan
must then be modified. These settings may then be
programmed into the radio and/or saved to a file on your PC.
Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for
details of setting choices on each Configurator software tab.
23. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save an A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify a
Instrument Configuration File window is no longer configuration and channel plan in your STRATA RX System is
displayed. shown in Figure 5-36 on page 5-19.
24. Select the General Operations - DCON option button
and observe the DCON option button label changes to
read CONN.
26. Disconnect the RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
PC.

Figure 5-36: Modify Configuration and Channel Plan 2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
LOAD RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your
CONFIGURATION CHANGE PC.
CONNECT AND CHANNEL PRESET
PLAN FROM SETTINGS
RADIO
CHANGE
PROGRAM TO
CHANNEL
RADIO
SAVE TO FILE 3. Set the DC power source to on.
PLAN
Step 10.
OR
SAVE TO FILE
connector.
Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX 7. Verify the RCU DC ON COAX switch is set to OFF.
contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector. 9. Set the RXU and RCU PWR switches to on ( I ).
Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a .

1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the 11. Observe the STRATA RX Configuration Utility main
RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector. page is displayed. See Figure 5-37 on page 5-20.

Figure 5-37: Main Page changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is

Figure 5-38: Connection Complete - Typical

DCON. See Figure 5-38 .
- The STRATA RXU and/or STRATA RCU configuration 14. Select the Radio Operations - READ option button
modules and data fields update to reflect the STRATA (See Figure 5-39 on page 5-21) and observe the
RX System hardware and firmware versions detected. following:
- The Chan Plan and Monitor tabs appear. - The Radio Operations - READ option button is
- The Radio, COFDM, MPEG, and FMR tabs become surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during the
active (not greyed-out), as applicable to your STRATA loading process.
RX System configuration. - ADVISORY: status messages are displayed during the
- The MONITOR OFF option button label changes to loading process.

- Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY: 16. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
message area during the loading process. displayed. See Figure 5-40.
- All Configurator tabs are inactive during the loading
process. Figure 5-40: Main Page - Typical
- The ADVISORY: message area indicates Loading
Configuration Has Completed... when the loading
process is complete.
- All Configurator tabs are active when the loading
15. Select each tab and make your choices for settings on
that page.
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on (See Figure 5-41 on page 5-22) and observe the
page C-1 for details of choices on each page. following indications:
Notes To load the new configuration settings and channel surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during
plan into your STRATA RX System, perform Step programming.
16 and Step 17. - ADVISORY: status messages are displayed during
programming.
To save the new configuration settings and channel - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
plan to a file on your PC, perform Step 18 thru Step message area during programming.
21.

- The ADVISORY: message area indicates Figure 5-43: Save an Instrument Configuration File -
Programming Radio Has Completed... when Typical
complete.

See Figure 5-42.
Figure 5-42: General Operations - SAVE Option Button

displayed.
read CONN.
19. Observe the Save an Instrument Configuration File PC.
25. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off
20. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box. ( O ).

5.3.4 Program a Configuration and Channel Plan
into a STRATA RX System from a File Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX
The procedure required to load a configuration and channel plan Configurator software installed.
from a file on your PC into your STRATA RX System is contained
in the following steps. When connecting a STRATA RX System that
Please note that a channel plan cannot be loaded into your contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
STRATA RX System unless your system contains an RXU. RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
In order to load the STRATA RX System configuration and
channel plan from a file, the system must be powered up and
must be connected to a PC which has the Configurator software Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a
running. System configuration and channel plan settings may standalone RXU or RCU, go to Step 1.
then be programmed into the radio from a file on your PC.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to program a If your STRATA RX System consists of both an
configuration and channel plan from a file into your STRATA RX RXU and an RCU, go to Step 5.
System is shown in Figure 5-44.
Figure 5-44: Program a Configuration and Channel Plan RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector.
into a STRATA RX System 2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
LOAD
CONFIGURATION PROGRAM TO
PC.
CONNECT
AND CHANNEL RADIO
PLAN FROM FILE
Note This procedure assumes the configuration and 3. Set the DC power source to on.
channel plan contained in the file on your PC are to 4. Set the RXU/RCU PWR switch to on ( I ) and go to
be loaded directly into your STRATA RX System Step 10.
and that no changes will be made to any of the
Configurator pages. 5. Verify the power cable is properly connected to both
connector.

7. Verify the RCU DC ON COAX switch is set to OFF. 12. Select the General Operations - CONN option button.
Note If you are unsure of power requirements, refer to Note In the following step, the Chan Plan tab will appear
the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1. only if your STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
8. Set the DC power source to on. 13. When connection is complete, observe the following:
9. Set the RXU and RCU PWR switches to on ( I ). - The CONN option button label changes to read
10. Start the Configurator software by double-clicking the DCON. See Figure 5-38 .
STRATA RX Configurator icon on your PC desktop. - The STRATA RXU and/or STRATA RCU configuration
. modules and data fields update to reflect the STRATA
11. Observe the STRATA RX Configuration Utility main - The MONITOR OFF option button label changes to
page is displayed. See Figure 5-45. read MONITOR ON, and, after a short delay, the label
Figure 5-45: Main Page the Preset name displayed in the pull-down menu


Figure 5-46: Connection Complete - Typical - The ADVISORY: message area indicates
complete.
Figure 5-47: Load an Instrument Configuration File Window

- Typical
14. Select the General Operations - LOAD option button

and observe the Load an Instrument Configuration
File window is displayed. See Figure 5-47.
15. Navigate to the file required in the Load an
Instrument Configuration File window and select it.
16. Select the Open option button.
(See Figure 5-48) and observe the following Figure 5-48: Radio Operations - PROG Option Button
indications:
programming.
programming. 18. Select the General Operations - DCON option button
- Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY: and observe the DCON option button label changes to
message area during programming. read CONN.
- All Configurator tabs are inactive during programming. 19. Close the STRATA RX Configuration Utility window.

20. Disconnect the RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU Table 5-1: Configurator Option Buttons (Continued)
PC. Page Option Button Action
21. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off COFDM Read COFDM Loads COFDM page settings
( O ). Settings from only from STRATA RX System.
22. Set the power source to off. Radio
Program Programs COFDM page settings
5.3.5 Load and Modify Individual Configuration COFDM Page only into STRATA RX System.
Settings
Pages
MPEG Read MPEG Loads MPEG page settings only
If the configuration programmed into your STRATA RX System Settings from from STRATA RX System.
requires minor changes, you can load individual Configurator Radio
software pages, modify them, and save the changes to a file or Program MPEG Programs MPEG page settings
load the changes into the STRATA RX System. Page Settings only into STRATA RX System.
Please note that a channel plan cannot be loaded or modified in FMR Read FMR Loads FMR page settings only
your STRATA RX System unless your system contains an RXU. Settings from from STRATA RX System.
Radio
The Radio Operations - READ and PROG option buttons on
the individual Radio, COFDM, MPEG, FMR, and Chan Plan Program FMR Programs FMR page settings
Page Settings only into STRATA RX System.
pages read (load) or program changes to/from that particular
page only. Changes made to other pages are not automatically Chan Plan Read Chan Loads Chan Plan page settings
loaded from or programmed into the system. Descriptions of the Plan settings only from STRATA RX System.
Configurator software page option buttons are shown in Table 5- from Radio
1. Program Chan Programs Chan Plan page
Plan Page settings only into STRATA RX
Table 5-1: Configurator Option Buttons
Settings System.
Page Option Button Action In order to modify individual system configuration or channel
Radio Read Radio Loads Radio page settings only plan pages, the STRATA RX System must be powered up and
Settings from from STRATA RX System. must be connected to a PC which has the Configurator software
Radio running. The individual page to be changed and the associated
Program Radio Programs Radio page settings Preset settings or channel plan must then be selected. System
Page Settings only into STRATA RX System. settings may then be programmed into the STRATA RX System
and/or saved to a file on your PC.

Note that programming changes into the STRATA RX System is
performed only on the page that was changed. When saving Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX
changes to a file on your PC however, the entire STRATA RX System is connected to a PC that has the
System configuration will be saved - not just the changes on that Configurator software installed.
particular page.
Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
details of setting choices on each Configurator software tab. RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify an either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
individual page is shown in Figure 5-49.
Figure 5-49: Modify Individual Configuration Pages Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a
CHANGE PAGE
CONNECT
SETTINGS

RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector.
PROGRAM TO
SAVE TO FILE
RADIO 2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
PC.
OR

SAVE TO FILE

Step 10.
connector.

7. Verify the RCU DC ON COAX switch is set to OFF. 12. Select the General Operations - CONN option button.
Note If you are unsure of power requirements, refer to Note In the following step, the Chan Plan tab will appear
the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1. only if your STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
8. Set the DC power source to on. 13. When connection is complete, observe the following:
9. Set the RXU and RCU PWR switches to on ( I ). - The CONN option button label changes to read
10. Start the Configurator software by double-clicking the DCON. See Figure 5-51 on page 5-29.
Figure 5-50: Main Page the Preset name displayed in the pull-down menu


Notes All changes made to configuration settings or
channel plans must be programmed into the
STRATA RX System from the page that was
changed.
For example, if changes were made to the FMR

page, the Radio FMR Operations - PROG option
button must be used to program FMR page
changes into the STRATA RX System.
In the following step, XXX represents Preset,

COFDM, MPEG, or FMR. On the Chan Plan page,
XXX is blank.
15. Select the applicable page Radio XXX Operations -

14. Select the required tab and make your changes to PROG option button (See Figure 5-52 on page 5-30)
settings on that page, as required. and observe the following indications:
- The Radio XXX Operations - PROG option button is
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during
page C-1 for details of choices on each page. programming.
Notes To load the new configuration settings or channel programming.
plan into your STRATA RX System, perform Step - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
15 and Step 16. message area during programming.
To save the new configuration settings or channel
plan to a file on your PC, perform Step 17 thru Step - The ADVISORY: message area indicates
20. Programming Radio Has Completed... when
To exit this procedure, go to Step 21. - All Configurator tabs are active when programming is
complete.

Figure 5-52: Radio Operations Option Button - Typical Figure 5-54: General Operations - SAVE option Button
16. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
Figure 5-53: Main Page - Typical 18. Observe the Save an Instrument Configuration File

Typical

See Figure 5-54.

displayed.

21. Select the General Operations - DCON option button Figure 5-56: Modify Individual Preset
read CONN. CHANGE PRESET
CONNECT
SETTINGS
PC.
24. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off PROGRAM TO
SAVE TO FILE
( O ). RADIO

OR
5.3.6 Modify Individual Preset Settings
If an individual Preset programmed into your STRATA RX SAVE TO FILE
System requires changes, you can load the applicable
Configurator software page(s), modify the Preset, and save the
Preset configuration to a file or load individual Preset
configuration settings into the STRATA RX System. Notes The following steps assume that your STRATA RX
In order to modify an individual Preset, the STRATA RX System System is connected to a PC that has the
must be powered up and must be connected to a PC which has Configurator software installed.
the Configurator software running. The individual Preset to be
changed must then be selected and Preset settings must be When connecting a STRATA RX System that
changed on all applicable pages. System settings may then be contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
programmed into the radio and/or saved to a file on your PC. RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
Note If more than one Preset requires changes, this
procedure must be repeated for each Preset
requiring change. Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify an
individual Preset is shown in Figure 5-56.

1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the 11. Observe the STRATA RX Configuration Utility main
RXU/RCU PWR/RS-485 connector. page is displayed. See Figure 5-57.
2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU/RCU
RS-232 connector and the RS-232 connector on your Figure 5-57: Main Page
PC.


Step 10.
connector.

10. Start the Configurator software by double-clicking the DCON. See Figure 5-58 on page 5-33.

active (not greyed-out), as applicable to your STRATA - ADVISORY: status messages are displayed during the
RX System configuration. loading process.
- The MONITOR OFF option button label changes to - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
read MONITOR ON, and, after a short delay, the label message area during the loading process.
changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is - All Configurator tabs are inactive during the loading
the Preset name displayed in the pull-down menu process.
- The ADVISORY: message area indicates Loading
Figure 5-58: Connection Complete - Typical Configuration Has Completed... when the loading
Figure 5-59: Radio Operations - READ Option Button
15. Select each tab and make your choices for the Preset
settings on that page, as applicable.
See the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on

page C-1 for details of choices on each page.
be loaded into the Configurator software after a Notes To load the new Preset settings into your STRATA
connection has been established. RX System, perform Step 16 thru Step 18.
14. Select the Radio Operations - READ option button To save the new Preset settings to a file on your
(See Figure 5-59) and observe the following: PC, perform Step 19 thru Step 22.
- The Radio Operations - READ option button is
surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during the
loading process.

16. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is 18. Select the Radio Operations - PROG option button
displayed. See Figure 5-60. (See Figure 5-62) and observe the following
indications:
Figure 5-60: Main Page - Typical - The Radio Operations - PROG option button is
programming.
programming.
- The ADVISORY: message area indicates
complete.

17. Select the General Operations Preset pull-down
menu and select the Preset to be programmed into the
STRATA RX System. See Figure 5-61.
Figure 5-61: General Operations Preset Pull-Down Menu

See Figure 5-63 on page 5-35.

Figure 5-63: General Operations - SAVE option Button 23. Select the General Operations - DCON option button
read CONN.
PC.
( O ).
20. Observe the Save an Instrument Configuration File
window is displayed. See Figure 5-64. 5.3.7 Create a New Channel Plan
The procedure required to create a new 2 GHz and/or a 7 GHz
channel plan is contained in the following steps.
Typical
Please note that a channel plan cannot be loaded or modified in
your STRATA RX System unless your system contains an RXU.
In order to create a new channel plan, the STRATA RX System
must be powered up and must be connected to a PC which has
the Configurator software running. Channel plan settings must
then be selected and the new channel plan created for the 2
GHz and/or 7 GHz channel plan. The channel plan may then be
loaded into your STRATA RX System and/or saved to a file on
your PC.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to create a
new channel plan is shown in Figure 5-65 on page 5-36.
21. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box
22. .Select the Save option button. Observe the Save an
displayed.

Figure 5-65: Create a New Channel Plan 1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the
RXU PWR/RS-485 connector.
CREATE
CONNECT
CHANNEL PLAN
2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU RS-232
connector and the RS-232 connector on your PC.

PROGRAM TO
SAVE TO FILE
RADIO
4. Set the RXU PWR switch to on ( I ) and go to Step 10.
OR 5. Verify the power cable is properly connected to both
SAVE TO FILE 6. Connect a coaxial cable between the RXU SIGNAL
connector.
Configurator software installed. the “Installation” Chapter on page 6-1.
.
standalone RXU, go to Step 1.

page is displayed. See Figure 5-66 on page 5-37.

Figure 5-66: Main Page changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is
13. When connection is complete, observe the following: Note By default, settings for Preset 1 will automatically
DCON. See Figure 5-67.
Note In the following step, when the Chan Plan tab is
RX System hardware and firmware versions detected. selected, the 2 GHz Band channel plan will be
- The Chan Plan and Monitor tabs appear. displayed as the default channel plan.
active (not greyed-out), as applicable to your STRATA 14. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan
RX System configuration. page is displayed. See Figure 5-68 on page 5-38.

Figure 5-68: Chan Plan Page - Typical 16. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected
Band pull-down menu and select the High Band
(7 GHz) option. See Figure 5-70.
Figure 5-70: Band Information Pull-Down Menu
17. Observe the 7 GHz Band channel plan is displayed.

See Figure 5-71.
15. Select the Channel 1 thru Channel 10 - Offset -. Figure 5-71: 7 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical
Figure 5-69. The value ranges are 1990.000 to
2500.000.
18. Select the Channel 1 thru Channel 14 - Offset -.

plan frequencies for each channel, as required. The

Notes When loading 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans into message area during programming.
the STRATA RX System, both the 2 GHz and the 7
GHz channel plans will be loaded into the radio
during the load process. - The ADVISORY: message area indicates
To load the new channel plan into your STRATA programming is complete.
RX System, perform Step 19. - All Configurator tabs are active when programming is
complete.
When saving channel plans to a file on your PC,
the 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans are saved in Figure 5-72: Radio Operations - PROG Option Button
separate files.
To save only the 2 GHz channel plan to a file on

your PC, perform Step 19 thru Step 23 and go to
Step 29.
To save both the 2 GHz and a 7 GHz channel

20. Select the File Access - SAVE option button. See
plans, perform Step 19 thru Step 28 and go to Step
Figure 5-73.
29.
Figure 5-73: File Access - SAVE option Button
To save only the 7 GHz channel plan, perform Step
24 thru Step 28 and go to Step 29.

indications: 21. Observe the Save Low Band Channel Plan window
- The Radio Operations - PROG option button is is displayed. See Figure 5-74 on page 5-40.
programming.
programming.

Figure 5-74: Save Low Band Channel Plan - Typical 26. Observe the Save High Band Channel Plan window
is displayed. See Figure 5-75.
Figure 5-75: Save High Band Channel Plan - Typical
Notes When entering a file name in the following step,

remember that the 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel
plans are saved as separate files on your PC.
Notes When entering a file name in the following step,
Enter a file name that will allow you to easily remember that the 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel
differentiate 2 GHz channel plan files from 7 GHz plans are saved as separate files on your PC.
channel plan files.
Enter a file name that will allow you to easily
22. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box. differentiate 7 GHz channel plan files from 2 GHz
23. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save channel plan files.
Low Band Channel Plan window is no longer
displayed. 27. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box.
24. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected 28. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save
Band pull-down menu and select the High Band High Band Channel Plan window is no longer
(7 GHz) option. displayed.
25. Select the File Access - SAVE option button. 29. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
displayed.

30. Select the General Operations - DCON option button Figure 5-76: Modify a Channel Plan from a File
read CONN. CHANGE
LOAD CHANNEL
CONNECT CHANNEL
PLAN FROM FILE
31. Close the STRATA RX Configuration Utility window. PLAN

PC.
33. Set the PWR switch on your RXU and/or RCU to off PROGRAM TO
SAVE TO FILE
( O ). RADIO

OR
5.3.8 Modify a Channel Plan from a File
The procedure required to modify a channel plan contained in a SAVE TO FILE
file on your PC is contained in the following steps.
In order to modify a STRATA RX System channel plan file on
your PC, the STRATA RX System must be powered up and must
be connected to a PC which has the Configurator software
running. The channel plan file must then be selected and When connecting a STRATA RX System that
channel plan settings must be modified. The modified channel
plan may then be loaded into your STRATA RX System and/or
RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
saved to a file on your PC. either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify a Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a
channel plan from a file is shown in Figure 5-76. standalone RXU, go to Step 1.


1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the Figure 5-77: Main Page


connector.
DCON. See Figure 5-78.
. RX System hardware and firmware versions detected.

changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is Figure 5-79: Chan Plan Page - Typical

15. Select the File Access - LOAD option button. See

Figure 5-80.
Figure 5-80: File Access Option Buttons
16. Observe the Open window is displayed. See

Figure 5-81 on page 5-44.
14. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan

Figure 5-81: Open Window - Typical
Notes If you are modifying a 2 GHz channel plan, perform
Step 19 and go to Step 23.
If you are modifying a 7 GHz channel plan, perform

Step 20 thru Step 22 and go to Step 23.

Figure 5-82. The value ranges are 1990.000 to
2500.000.
Notes 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plan files are saved

separately on your PC.
When selecting a channel plan file to be modified,

ensure that you select a channel plan file that
corresponds with the channel plan frequency band
required.
17. Navigate to the file required in the Open window and

select it.
18. Select the Open option button and observe the 20. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected
ADVISORY: message box displays Loading of Band pull-down menu and select the High Band
Channel Plan Has Completed... when loading is (7 GHz) option. See Figure 5-83.
complete.

Figure 5-83: Band Information Pull-Down Menu
Notes When loading channel plans into the STRATA RX
System, both the 2 GHz and the 7 GHz channel
plans will be loaded into the radio during the load
process.
To load the modified channel plan into your

STRATA RX System, go to Step 23.
21. Observe the 7 GHz Band channel plan is displayed.
See Figure 5-84. When saving channel plans to a file on your PC,
the 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans are saved in
Figure 5-84: 7 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical separate files.
To save the modified channel plan to a file on your

PC, go to Step 24.

indications:
programming.
programming.
Center, and Offset + text boxes and enter channel - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
plan frequencies for each channel, as required. The message area during programming.
value ranges are 6400.000 to 7200.000. - All Configurator tabs are inactive during programming.

- All Configurator tabs are active when programming is Figure 5-87: Save XXX Band Channel Plan - Typical
complete.
24. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected

Band pull-down menu and select the Low Band
(2 GHz) option or High Band (7 GHz) option, as
required.
Figure 5-86.
Figure 5-86: File Access - SAVE option Button Notes When entering a file name in the following step,
remember that 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans
are saved as separate files on your PC.

differentiate 2 GHz channel plan files from 7 GHz
channel plan files.
Note In the following steps, XXX represents either the

Low or High channel plan, depending upon which Note In the following step, keep in mind that different
channel plan frequency you are saving. versions of Windows have different rules for
naming files.
26. Observe the Save XXX Band Channel Plan window
is displayed. See Figure 5-87. 27. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box.
28. Select the Save option button. Observe the Save
XXX Band Channel Plan window is no longer
displayed.

29. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is Figure 5-88: Modify a Channel Plan from a STRATA RX
displayed. System
LOAD CHANNEL CHANGE
and observe the DCON option button label changes to CONNECT PLAN FROM CHANNEL
read CONN. RADIO PLAN

PC. PROGRAM TO
SAVE TO FILE
RADIO
( O ).
34. Set the power source to off. OR
5.3.9 Modify a Channel Plan from a STRATA RX SAVE TO FILE

System
The procedure required to modify a channel plan contained in
your STRATA RX System is contained in the following steps.
In order to modify the STRATA RX System channel plan, the
system must be powered up and must be connected to a PC When connecting a STRATA RX System that
which has the Configurator software running. The 2 GHz and/or contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the
7 GHz channel plan must then be selected and the channel plan RS-232 cable from the PC may be connected to
settings must be modified. The modified channel plan may then either the RXU or the RCU RS-232 connector.
be loaded into your STRATA RX System and/or saved to a file on
your PC.
Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for Notes If your STRATA RX System consists of a
details of setting choices on each Configurator software tab. standalone RXU, go to Step 1.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to modify a If your STRATA RX System consists of both an
channel plan contained in your STRATA RX System is shown in RXU and an RCU, go to Step 5.
Figure 5-88.

1. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the Figure 5-89: Main Page


connector.
DCON. See Figure 5-78 on page 5-43.
. RX System hardware and firmware versions detected.

changes to also display Preset 1, where Preset 1 is Figure 5-91: Chan Plan Page - Typical

Note When the Radio Operations - READ option button

is selected in the following step, both the 2 GHz
and the 7 GHz channel plans will be read from the
STRATA RX System.
15. Select the Radio Operations - READ option button

(See Figure 5-59 on page 5-33) and observe the
following:
- The Radio Operations - READ option button is
surrounded by a flashing, light blue frame during the
loading process.
displayed as the default channel plan. - ADVISORY: status messages are displayed during the
loading process.
14. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan - Progress bars are displayed beneath the ADVISORY:
page is displayed. See Figure 5-91. message area during the loading process.
- All Configurator tabs are inactive during the loading
process.

- The ADVISORY: message area indicates Loading Figure 5-93: 2 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical
Configuration Has Completed... when the loading
Notes If only the 2 GHz channel plan is to be modified, 17. Select the Band Information - Currently Selected
perform Step 16 and go to Step 20. Band pull-down menu and select the High Band
(7 GHz) option. See Figure 5-94.
If both the 2 GHz and 7 Ghz channel plans are to
be modified, perform Step 16 thru Step 19 and go Figure 5-94: Band Information Pull-Down Menu
to Step 20.
If only the 7 GHz channel plan is to be modified,

perform Step 17 thru Step 19 and go to Step 20.

plan frequencies for each channel, as required. See 18. Observe the 7 GHz Band channel plan is displayed.
Figure 5-93. The value ranges are 1990.000 to See Figure 5-95 on page 5-51.
2500.000.

Figure 5-95: 7 GHz Band Channel Plan - Typical 20. Select the Radio Operations - PROG option button
indications:
programming.
programming.
Center, and Offset + text boxes and enter channel - All Configurator tabs are active when programming is
plan frequencies for each channel, as required. The complete.
Notes When the Radio Operations - PROG option

button is selected in the following step, both the 2
GHz and 7 GHz channel plans will be loaded into
the STRATA RX System, even if only one channel
plan was modified.
To load the new channel plan into your STRATA Notes 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plan files are saved
RX System, go to Step 20. separately on your PC.
To save the new channel plan to a file on your PC, If you are saving a 2 GHz channel plan, perform
go to Step 21. Step 21 thru Step 25 and go to Step 31.
To exit this procedure, go to Step 31. If you are saving a 7 GHz channel plan, go to Step
26.

Band pull-down menu and select the Low Band Notes When entering a file name in the following step,
(2 GHz) option, as required. remember that 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans
are saved as separate files on your PC.
Figure 5-97.
differentiate 2 GHz channel plan files from 7 GHz
channel plan files.

Low Band Channel Plan window is no longer
displayed.
23. Observe the Save Low Band Channel Plan window Band pull-down menu and select the High Band
is displayed. See Figure 5-98. (7 GHz) option, as required.
Figure 5-98: Save Low Band Channel Plan - Typical 27. Select the File Access - SAVE option button. See
Figure 5-99.
28. Observe the Save High Band Channel Plan window

is displayed. See Figure 5-100 on page 5-53.

Figure 5-100: Save High Band Channel Plan - Typical 33. Close the STRATA RX Configuration Utility window.
PC.
( O ).
5.3.10 Program a Channel Plan into a STRATA RX

System from a File
Once a 2 Ghz or a 7 GHz channel plan has been created and
saved to a file, you can program it into your STRATA RX System.
In order to program a channel plan into your STRATA RX System
Notes When entering a file name in the following step, from a file on your PC, the system must be powered up and must
remember that 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans be connected to a PC which has the Configurator software
are saved as separate files on your PC. running. The channel plan file must then be selected and loaded
into your STRATA RX System.
Enter a file name that will allow you to easily Refer to the “Configurator Reference” Appendix on page C-1 for
differentiate 7 GHz channel plan files from 2 GHz details of setting choices on each Configurator software tab.
channel plan files.
A flowchart showing the basic operations required to program a
29. Enter a file name in the File Name: text box. channel plan into a STRATA RX System is shown in Figure 5-
101.
High Band Channel Plan window is no longer
Figure 5-101: Program a Channel Plan from a File
displayed.
31. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
displayed. LOAD CHANNEL PROGRAM TO
CONNECT
PLAN FROM FILE RADIO
read CONN.

Configurator software installed. Note If you are unsure of power requirements, refer to
contains both an RXU and an RCU to a PC, the 8. Set the DC power source to on.
.
standalone RXU, go to Step 1.

2. Connect an RS-232 cable between the RXU RS-232 Figure 5-102: Main Page


connector.

12. Select the General Operations - CONN option button. Figure 5-103: Connection Complete - Typical

DCON. See Figure 5-103 on page 5-55.
- The MONITOR OFF option button label changes to Figure 5-104: Chan Plan Page - Typical


14. Select the Chan Plan tab and observe the Chan Plan 15. Select the File Access - LOAD option button. See
page is displayed. See Figure 5-104. Figure 5-105 on page 5-56.

Figure 5-105: File Access Option Buttons 17. Navigate to the file required in the Open window and
select it.
18. Select the Open option button and observe the
ADVISORY: message box Loading of Channel Plan
Has Completed... is displayed.
16. Observe the Open window is displayed. See indications:
Figure 5-106. - The Radio Operations - PROG option button is
Figure 5-106: Open Window - Typical programming.
programming.
complete.
Notes 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plan files are saved

separately on your PC.
When selecting a channel plan file to be modified,

ensure that you select a channel plan file that 20. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is
corresponds with the channel plan frequency band displayed.
required.

read CONN.
PC.
( O ).


6 Installation •
•
Be sure to locate all parts and accessories.
Verify that the items shipped agree with those listed on
the sales order.
6.1 Chapter Overview • DO NOT discard the container or packing material until
you have inspected the equipment and are sure there is
This chapter describes how to unpack and install your STRATA no shipping damage. The container and packing must be
RX System. The topics covered in this chapter are listed below. available in the event that a damage claim needs to be
filed with the shipping carrier.
Topic Page
6.3 Initial Inspection
Unpacking 6-1
After the equipment is unpacked, we recommend you inspect it
Initial Inspection 6-1
using the following checklist:
Damage in Shipment 6-1
• Check for any dents or scratches. If the equipment is
Mounting and Cabling 6-2
dented or scratched, it may have suffered internal
Power Connections 6-12 damage as well.
Grounding 6-16
• Check that the equipment is clean and dry.
Audio Connections 6-16
• Check that no cables or connectors are broken, damaged,
Signal Connections 6-20
or loose.
Data Connections 6-21
• Check that no switches or LED indicators are broken,
Powering Up 6-26
damaged, or loose.
Product Modifications 6-26
6.4 Damage in Shipment

6.2 Unpacking
Should any damage be discovered after unpacking the unit, use
Each unit is shipped assembled, wired, and factory tested. Each the following procedure:
unit is packaged in appropriate shipping containers.
• Immediately file a claim with the shipping carrier.
Here are some tips to help you with unpacking your new
equipment: • Forward a copy of the damage report to MRC Customer
Service.
• Unpack the equipment carefully to avoid accidental
damage. • Contact MRC Customer Service to determine the
disposition of the equipment.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Installation 6-1

6.5 Mounting and Cabling The RXU and RCU must have the correct mounting hardware
installed, with mating “ears” and screws to attach to the Fixed
Each installation or deployment will have its own specific tasks Mounting Bracket. If your RXU or RCU was originally equipped
according to the application and the installed hardware. The for use with a Universal Mounting Bracket, it will not have this
following sections describe two options for mounting and cabling hardware.
the STRATA RX:
Consult your Sales Representative or MRC for the hardware
• Floor/Bulkhead Installation needed to convert these units to use the Fixed Mounting
• Portable Deployment Bracket.
Cabling Wiring mounted in a moving aircraft or vehicle is
6.5.1 Floor/Bulkhead Installation subject to extremes of temperature, humidity, and vibration.
MRC recommends the following good general practices:
For mobile applications such as an aircraft or vehicle, the
STRATA RX System is usually bolted in place, and the cabling is • Secure the cabling at close intervals along its entire
permanently installed. Power comes from aircraft (or vehicle) length.
power. • Protect the cabling with additional sheathing or padding
Mounting The STRATA RX System is typically mounted on a anywhere it passes through a hole or lays against an
bulkhead or on the floor of a compartment using an MRC Fixed obstruction.
Mounting Bracket. The Fixed Mounting bracket accepts both the • Provide flex relief at any location where the cable must
RXU and RCU, and provides “ears” at the front to which the RXU change direction sharply, to maintain a smooth bend and
and RCU attach. See Figure 6-1.
prevent kinking.
Figure 6-1: Two-Unit RX System Fixed Mounting Bracket • Provide strain relief at each connector to absorb any
pulling forces on the cable and prevent damage to the
connector.
CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be

protected. Do not run cords where they can
be walked upon. Protect cables against
pinching and chafing. Pay special attention
to locations where the cables enter or exit
an enclosure or make a sharp bend.

attach either the Quick Release Mount or the Dovetail Adapter
Plate.
CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected
by overcurrent protection devices as The various options available to attach the RX System to an
required by the applicable electrical codes. MRC tripod or to non-MRC tripods are described in the following
paragraphs.
Be sure the power being supplied matches

6.5.3 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - MRC
CAUTION
the power required by the equipment. Tripod
A standalone STRATA RXU or RCU will typically be attached to
a Quick Release Mount for easy mounting on an MRC tripod.
6.5.2 Portable Deployment The Quick Release Mount is attached to the bottom of the
Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat
For portable deployment applications, the STRATA RX System head screws. See Figure 6-2 for the hardware stackup.
will typically be moved from place to place and set up each time.
The power, antennas, and audio/video connections are usually Figure 6-2: Universal Mounting Bracket and Quick Release
removed at the end of each deployment. Mount - Hardware Stackup
To mount a STRATA RX System on an MRC tripod, MRC offers a Universal Flat Head
Quick Release Mount. For portable deployment Operations Mounting Screws
where you are mounting the STRATA RX System to another type Bracket
of tripod that doesn’t directly accept the MRC Quick Release
Note:
Mount, consult with MRC or your tripod manufacturer. Quick Release Not drawn to
MRC has Dovetail Adapter Plates that will convert some types of Mount scale.
tripods to accept the MRC Quick Release Mount system.
When attaching an MRC Quick Release Mount or Dovetail The Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the
Adapter Plate to a non-MRC tripod, the Quick Release Mount Universal Mounting Bracket. See Figure 6-3 on page 6-4.
and Dovetail Adapter Plate both have standard tripod mounting The RXU/RCU is installed in the Universal Mounting Bracket and
features and your tripod mount may not require modifications to is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
attach the Quick Release Mount or Dovetail Adapter Plate. The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting Bracket
The method required to attach a Quick Release Mount or and the RXU/RCU, is then attached to the Dovetail Adapter Plate
Dovetail Adapter Plate to a non-MRC tripod mount is your machined in the MRC tripod mount.
responsibility and you may have to modify your tripod mount to The RXU/RCU does not need to be removed from the Universal
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment.

Figure 6-3: Standalone RXU/RCU Tripod Mount - MRC and Mounting Plate using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Tripod screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-4.
Universal
Figure 6-4: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,
Mounting
and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
Bracket
3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
Head Screws Not drawn to
Latches scale.
(2 Each) Universal
Mounting Mounting
Quick Release Plate Bracket
Mount
Dovetail Adapter Quick

Release 1/2-Inch Long
Plate (Machined) Flat Head Screws
Mount
MRC Tripod The Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the
Mount Mounting Plate and Universal Mounting Bracket.
The upper Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the lower
Universal Mounting Bracket and is secured in position using the
two thumbwheel screws located on the lower Universal Mounting
Bracket. See Figure 6-5 on page 6-5.
6.5.4 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting -

MRC Tripod
The STRATA RX System may include a RXU, RCU, or both a
RXU and RCU and the optional ACU. The RXU, RCU, and ACU
each require individual Universal Mounting Brackets and a
Mounting Plate for installation on an MRC tripod.
A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the Mounting Plate
using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws. The Quick
Release Mount is attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket

Figure 6-5: RXU and/or RCU and ACU Tripod Mount - MRC When your STRATA RX System consists of a standalone RXU or
Tripod RCU, the RXU or RCU is installed in the upper Universal
Mounting Bracket and is secured using the two Universal
RXU/RCU Universal RXU Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket
(Standalone) or When your STRATA RX System consists of both a RXU and a
(RXU and RCU RCU, each unit requires a separate Universal Mounting Bracket.
RCU Universal System)
Mounting Bracket The RCU is installed in the middle Universal Mounting Bracket
(RXU and RCU and the RXU is installed in the upper Universal Mounting
System) Bracket. Both units are secured using the Universal Mounting
Universal Bracket latches.
Mounting Bracket
The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting
Latches
Thumbwheel Brackets, ACU, and RXU and/or RCU, is then attached to the
Screws Dovetail Adapter Plate machined in the MRC tripod mount. See
ACU Universal
Mounting Mounting Bracket The ACU and RX System do not need to be removed from the
Plate Universal Mounting Brackets at the end of each deployment.
Quick Dovetail Note The versatility of the Quick Release Mount and a
Release Adapter Plate mating Dovetail Adapter Plate allows the Quick
Mount (Machined) Release Mount to be attached to the bottom of the
Universal Mounting Bracket and the Dovetail
MRC Adapter Plate to be attached to a non-MRC tripod,
Tripod or vice versa.
Mount
The method you use to attach the STRATA RX
System to a non-MRC tripod is your choice.
The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket

and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
latches.

Figure 6-6: TX System and ACU MRC Tripod Mount - Quick Release Mount will typically remain attached to the
Typical Universal Mounting Bracket.
Universal Figure 6-7: Universal Mounting Bracket and Quick Release

Mounting RXU or Mount - Hardware Stackup
Brackets RCU Flat Head
Universal
Mounting Screws
Mounting ACU
Plate Bracket
Note:
Quick Release Not drawn to
Dovetail
Quick Adapter Plate Mount scale.
Release (Machined)
Mount The Dovetail Adapter Plate is then attached to the non-MRC
tripod mount. See Figure 6-8 on page 6-7
The RXU/RCU is installed in the Universal Mounting Bracket and
Tripod is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting Bracket
and the RXU/RCU, is then attached to the Dovetail Adapter Plate
attached to the non-MRC tripod mount.
The RXU/RCU does not need to be removed from the Universal
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment.
6.5.5 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - Non-MRC

Tripod (Option 1)
To mount a standalone RXU/RCU on a non-MRC tripod, one
option is to attach the Quick Release Mount to the bottom of the
Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat
head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-7. The

Figure 6-8: RXU/RCU Tripod Mount - Non-MRC Tripod A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the Mounting Plate
using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws. The Quick
Universal Release Mount is attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket
Mounting and Mounting Plate using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Bracket screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,

Latches and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
(2 Each)
3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
Quick Release Head Screws Not drawn to
Mount scale.
Universal
Dovetail Adapter
Mounting Mounting
Plate
Plate Bracket
Non-MRC Quick
Tripod Mount Release 1/2-Inch Long Flat
Mount Head Screws
The Dovetail Adapter Plate is then attached to the non-MRC

tripod mount.
6.5.6 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - two thumbwheel screws on the lower Universal Mounting
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 2) Bracket. See Figure 6-10 on page 6-8.
To mount a TX System and an optional ACU on a non-MRC The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket
tripod, one option is to attach the Quick Release Mount to the and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
bottom of a Mounting Plate and to attach a Dovetail Adapter latches. The STRATA RX System is installed in the upper
Plate to the non-MRC tripod mount. The RXU and/or RCU and Universal Mounting Bracket(s) and is secured using the
the optional ACU require individual Universal Mounting Brackets Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
and the Mounting Plate for installation. The Quick Release Mount, with the Universal Mounting
Brackets, ACU, and RX System, is then attached to the Dovetail

Adapter Plate attached to the non-MRC tripod mount. 6.5.7 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - Non-MRC
The RX System and ACU do not need to be removed from the Tripod (Option 3)
Universal Mounting Brackets at the end of each deployment. To mount a standalone RXU or RCU on a non-MRC tripod,
another option is to attach the Dovetail Adapter Plate to the
Figure 6-10: RXU and/or RCU and ACU Tripod Mount - Non- bottom of the Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch
MRC Tripod long, #6-32, flat head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in
RXU/RCU Universal Figure 6-11. The Dovetail Adapter Plate will typically remain
RXU Universal attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket
(Standalone) or (RXU and RCU
RCU Universal Figure 6-11: Universal Mounting Bracket and Dovetail
System) Adapter Plate - Hardware Stackup
Mounting Bracket
(RXU and RCU Universal Flat Head
System) Mounting Screws
Universal
Bracket
Mounting Bracket
Latches Note:
Thumbwheel Dovetail Not drawn to
Screws Adapter Plate scale.
ACU Universal
Mounting Mounting Bracket The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC
Plate tripod mount.
Quick Dovetail is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
Release Adapter Plate The Dovetail Adapter Plate, with the Universal Mounting Bracket
Mount and the RXU/RCU, is then attached to the Quick Release Mount
attached to the non-MRC tripod mount. See Figure 6-12 on
MRC page 6-9.
Tripod The RX System does not need to be removed from the Universal
Mount Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment.

Figure 6-12: Quick Release Mount on Non-MRC Tripod Mounting Plate using four 3/8-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws.
The Dovetail Adapter Plate is attached to the Mounting Plate and
RXU/RCU Universal Mounting Bracket using four 1/2-inch long, #6-32, flat
Universal head screws. Hardware stackup is as shown in Figure 6-13.
Mounting
Bracket Figure 6-13: Universal Mounting Bracket, Mounting Plate,
and Quick Release Mount - Hardware Stackup
Universal 3/8-Inch Long Flat Note:
Dovetail Mounting Not drawn to
Head Screws
Adapter Bracket Latches scale.
Plate Mounting
Quick Plate Universal
Release Mounting
Mount Bracket
Non-MRC
Tripod Mount Dovetail
Adapter 1/2-Inch Long Flat
Plate Head Screws
The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC

tripod mount. See Figure 6-14 on page 6-10.
two thumbwheel screws on the lower Universal Mounting
6.5.8 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - Bracket.
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 4)
To mount a STRATA RX System and an optional ACU on a non-
MRC tripod, another option is to attach the Dovetail Adapter
Plate to the bottom of a Mounting Plate and to attach the Quick
Release Mount to the non-MRC tripod.
The RXU, RCU, and the optional ACU each require individual
Universal Mounting Brackets and a Mounting Plate for
installation. A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to the

Figure 6-14: Quick Release Mount on Non-MRC Tripod - RX 6.5.9 Standalone RXU/RCU Mounting - QuickSet
System and ACU Tripod Mount (Option 5)
Universal To mount a standalone RXU or RCU on a non-MRC tripod that
Mounting contains a QuickSet tripod mount, a QuickSet Quick Change
Brackets Adapter is attached to the bottom of the Universal Mounting
Bracket using four 3/4-inch long, #6-32, flat head screws, flat
Thumbwheel washers, lock washers, and nuts. Hardware stackup is as
Screws shown in Figure 6-15.
Universal
Mounting Figure 6-15: QuickSet Quick Change Adapter - Hardware
Bracket Latches Stackup
Flat Head
ACU Universal Universal Screws Note:
Mounting Mounting Not drawn to
Mounting scale.
Bracket Bracket
Plate
Quick Change
Dovetail
Adapter
Adapter
Plate Quick Flat Flat
Release Washers Washers
Mount Lock Lock
Nuts Washers
Washers
Non-MRC
Tripod Mount The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter will typically remain
attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket latches.
The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter, with the Universal
Mounting Bracket and the RXU/RCU, is then attached to the
QuickSet tripod mount and is secured with the tripod mount
locking clamp. See Figure 6-16 on page 6-11.

The RXU/RCU does not need to be removed from the Universal A Universal Mounting Bracket is attached to a Mounting Plate
Mounting Bracket at the end of each deployment. using four 3/8-inch flat head screws. The Universal Mounting
Bracket and Mounting Plate are then attached to a QuickSet
Figure 6-16: Quick Change Adapter On Quickset Tripod Quick Change Adapter using four 3/4-inch long, #6-32, flat head
Mount screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. Hardware stackup
is as shown in Figure 6-17.
RXU/RCU
Universal
Figure 6-17: QuickSet Quick Change Adapter - Hardware
Mounting
Stackup
Bracket
3/8-Inch Long Flat 3/4-Inch Long 3/8-Inch Long Flat
Universal Head Screws Flat Head Head Screws
Quick
Mounting Universal Screws
Change
Adapter Bracket Latches Mounting Note:
Bracket Not drawn to
Tripod Mount
scale.
Locking
Clamp Quick Change
Adapter Mounting
Plate
QuickSet
Tripod Mount Flat Flat
Washers Washers
Lock Lock
Nuts Washers
Washers
The QuickSet Quick Change Adapter will typically remain

attached to the Universal Mounting Bracket.
6.5.10 STRATA RX System and ACU Mounting - The Quick Release Mount is then attached to the non-MRC
tripod mount.
Non-MRC Tripod (Option 6)
To mount a STRATA RX System and an optional ACU on a non-
MRC tripod that contains a QuickSet tripod mount, the RX
two thumbwheel screws on the lower Universal Mounting
System and the optional ACU each require individual Universal
Bracket.
Mounting Brackets and a Mounting Plate for installation.

The ACU is installed in the lower Universal Mounting Bracket 6.6 Power Connections
and is secured using the two Universal Mounting Bracket
latches. The RX System is installed in the upper Universal
Mounting Bracket(s) and is secured using the Universal
6.6.1 Power Requirements
Mounting Bracket latches. See Figure 6-18. The STRATA RXU and RCU have the following power
requirements.
The Dovetail Adapter Plate, with the Universal Mounting
Brackets, ACU, and RX System, is then attached to the Quick Supply Voltage: +10.5 to +36 Volts DC
Release Mount attached to the non-MRC tripod mount.
Power Consumption: 36 watts nominal
Figure 6-18: Quick Change Adapter on QuickSet Tripod Certain other voltages can be accommodated by special
Mount - ACU and RX System request; contact your Sales Representative for the latest details.
Universal
Mounting 6.6.2 Power Supply and Distribution
Brackets DC power is supplied externally, from the optional STRATA ACU
power supply or from another source such as aircraft or vehicle
Thumbwheel power.
Screws
Power is distributed to the RX in one of two ways: through the
Universal front panel connectors on both the RXU and RCU, or over the
Mounting coaxial cable connecting the RXU and RCU.
Bracket Latches
Which method you use will depend on whether the RXU and
Mounting
RCU are located together (“co-located”) or are in separate
Plate ACU Universal locations.
Mounting
Bracket RXU and RCU Co-Located If the RXU and RCU are
co-located, power is usually supplied to each unit through its
QuickSet
power connector, from the same power source. See Figure 6-19
Quick
QuickSet on page 6-13.
Change
Tripod
Adapter
Mount
Tripod
Mount
Locking
Clamp

Figure 6-19: Powering the RXU and RCU Independently the RCU it is on the rear panel. In both cases it is labelled
POWER/RS-485.
STRATA STRATA The mating connector that plugs into this panel connector is
RXU RCU described below.
Power Power Manufacturer: ITT Cannon
Cable Cable
Part Number KPT06F12-8S
DC Power (+10.5 V - +36 V)
Description: 8-pin female, cable-mount.
See Figure 6-21 for pin designations on the panel connector.
RXU and RCU Separated If your installation calls for The mating connector is shown in Figure 6-22 on page 6-14.
separating the RXU and RCU, the RXU can be powered by DC See Table 6-1 on page 6-14 for connections.
supplied by the RCU via the coaxial cable between the units.
See Figure 6-20. Figure 6-21: Panel Power Connector - Front View
Figure 6-20: Powering the RXU from the RCU
Coax
STRATA STRATA
RXU RCU
up to 600’ Power
(200 m) Cable
DC Power (+10.5 V - +36 V)
CAUTION Turn off DC Power on the coax before

connecting any test equipment.
Panel Power Connections The RXU and RCU use the same
type of power connector. In the RXU it is on the front panel; on

Figure 6-22: Mating Power Cable Connector - End View 6.6.3 Power Cable Assemblies
G Power cable assemblies are available from MRC to power single
A (RXU or RCU) or multiple STRATA RX System units (RXU and
RCU).
H
DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly A prefabricated DC to DC
Wire Harness Assembly (See Figure 6-23 on page 6-15) is
B F available from MRC to connect the ACU DC OUTPUT connector
to either the RXU PWR/RS-485 connector or the RCU POWER
connector.
C E
This wire harness assembly is available in two lengths (3 ft. / 1 m
D or 10 ft. / 3 m) and comes complete with 8-pin connectors wired
on each end. One cable is provided with each STRATA ACU
ordered. If your STRATA RX System consists of a co-located
RCU and RXU, a DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly is
Table 6-1: Power Connections available.
DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly Both the RXU
Pin Function Comment and RCU should be powered from the same DC power source
A DC Power (+) Use 18 ga. stranded wire for when the RXU and RCU are co-located. A prefabricated DC to
lengths up to 10’ (3 m). Use 1 DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly (See Figure 6-24 on
B
wire for each pin (3 wires total). page 6-15) is available from MRC to connect the ACU DC
C Consult factory if you need OUTPUT connector to the RXU PWR/RS-485 connector and the
longer cabling. RCU POWER connector for this application.
D DC Return (-) Use 18 ga. stranded wire for The DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly must be
E lengths up to 10’ (3 m). Use 1 ordered with the STRATA ACU for co-located RXU and RCU
wire for each pin (2 wires total). operations.
Consult factory if you need
longer cabling.
F Not Used
G
H

Figure 6-23: DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly
Figure 6-24: DC to DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly
RED A A +V
RED B B +V
RED C C +V
BLK D D GND
BLK E E GND
F F
G G
H H
A +V
B +V
C +V
D GND
E GND
WIRING DIAGRAM F
G
H

6.6.4 Additional Powering Notes
Check the electrical supply to be sure it can provide all the power CAUTION Be sure the equipment grounding follows
needed at the site without overloading. Power ratings for applicable electrical codes.
equipment can be found on a rating plate, usually on the rear
panel. If necessary, consult a licensed electrician.
CAUTION Never modify a grounded power plug to
CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be connect to an ungrounded receptacle.
protected. Do not run cords where they can
be walked upon. Protect cables against
pinching and chafing. Pay special attention
to locations where the cables enter or exit
6.8 Audio Connections
an enclosure or make a sharp bend. The STRATA RX can provide Analog Audio Output or Digital
Audio Output, depending on how the RX is configured. All audio
outputs appear on the same panel connector.
CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected The functions of some of the pins will change between
by overcurrent protection devices as analog output and digital output. You’ll need to plan your
required by the applicable electrical codes. usage in advance and complete your audio wiring accordingly.
6.8.1 Panel Connections

CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches The RXU and RCU both use the same type of audio connector.
the power required by the equipment. In the RXU it is on the front panel; on the RCU it is on the rear
panel. I n both cases it is labelled AUDIO.
6.7 Grounding The mating connector that plugs into this panel connector is
described below.
The mounting bracket and equipment must be connected to the
common ground on the installation. This common ground is often Manufacturer: Amphenol (or ITT Cannon)
the vehicle or aircraft ground. The ground wire should be as
short as possible, and follow the straightest path possible. Part Number MS3116F12-10S (KPT06F12-10S)
Description: 10-pin female, cable-mount.

See Figure 6-25 on page 6-17 for pin designations on the panel
connector.

Figure 6-25: Audio Panel Connector Digital Mode In Digital Mode, the RX receives a digital signal
and routes the data to the COFDM demodulator and then to the
MPEG decoder. The RX’s audio switching circuitry connects the
output of the MPEG Decoder to the Audio connector.
When configured for Analog Audio Output, the MPEG Decoder
provides either 2 stereo or 4 monaural channels. All 4 circuits
are balanced outputs (Live, Return, Ground).
In Digital Mode, the Audio channels are referred to as Audio A
and Audio B.
The connections used for Analog Audio Output are described
in Table 6-2 on page 6-18.
6.8.2 Analog Audio Output Audio Cable Assembly A prefabricated cable assembly is
The RX will provide Analog Audio Output in the following available that splits the audio connections from the front panel
circumstances: into 4 separate cables with XLR connectors. The 4 cables are
labelled Audio 1, 2, 3, and 4. One cable is included with each RX
• When the RX is operating in Analog Mode. ordered.
• When the RX is operating in Digital Mode, and the MPEG The connections in this cable are shown in Table 6-2 on page 6-
Decoder is configured to provide Analog Audio Output. 18.
Analog Mode In Analog Mode, the RX routes the received
analog signal through its analog FM demodulator. The RX’s
audio switching circuitry connects the output of the FM
demodulator to the Audio connector.
The analog demodulator provides either 2 stereo or 4 monaural
channels. All 4 circuits are balanced outputs (Live, Return,
Ground).
In Analog Mode, the RX Configurator and in the RX Monitor
Screens refer to these 4 analog circuits as Audio Channels 1, 2,
3, and 4.
The connections used for Analog Audio Output are described
in Table 6-2 on page 6-18.

Table 6-2: Audio Connections - Analog Audio Output
Panel Audio Cable

Connector Function Analog Mode Digital Mode
Pin XLR Connector Pin Number
Audio A
A Right (return) Controlled by “Audio 1” in 3
B Ground Configurator, displayed as 1
Audio 1
“Audio 1” in Monitor Controlled by “Audio A” in
C Right (live) Screens. 2
Configurator, displayed as
D Left (return) Controlled by “Audio 2” in “Audio A” in Monitor 3
Configurator, displayed as Screens.
B Ground Audio 2 1
“Audio 2” in Monitor
E Left (live) Screens. 2
Audio B
F Right (return) Controlled by “Audio 3” in 3
G Ground Configurator, displayed as 1
Audio 3
“Audio 3” in Monitor Controlled by “Audio B” in
H Right (live) Screens. 2
Configurator, displayed as
J Left (return) Controlled by “Audio 4” in “Audio B” in Monitor 3
Configurator, displayed as Screens.
G Ground Audio 4 1
“Audio 4” in Monitor
K Left (live) Screens. 2

6.8.3 Digital Audio Output (AES/EBU) The connections in this cable are as shown in Table 6-3 on
page 6-20.
The RX will only provide Digital Audio Output when operating
in Digital Mode.
In Digital Mode, the RX receives a digital signal and routes the
data to the COFDM demodulator and then to the MPEG decoder.
The RX’s audio switching circuitry connects the output of the
MPEG Decoder to the Audio connector.
When configured for Digital Audio Output (AES/EBU), the
MPEG Decoder provides 2 paired channels of digital data (+
and -), or 4 individual channels. All 4 circuits are unbalanced
outputs, with each pair (+ and -) sharing one ground.
In Digital Mode, the Audio channels are referred to as Audio A
and Audio B.
Audio A In Digital Audio Output, Audio A continues to provide
analog audio with all the same pinouts and functions as in
Analog Audio Output.
Audio B In Digital Audio Output, all the digital data appears in
Audio B.
The connections used for Digital Audio Output are described in
Table 6-3 on page 6-20.
Note - One Channel Disabled If you’re using Digital Mode and
you turn off Audio A at the transmitter, the transmitter does not
send a Packet ID code (PID) for Audio A. In the RX, the MPEG
decoder detects the lack of a PID for Audio A and automatically
duplicates the Audio B information onto Audio A.
Audio Cable Assembly A prefabricated cable assembly is
available that splits the audio connections from the front panel
connector into 4 separate cables with XLR connectors. One
cable is included with each RX ordered.

Table 6-3: Audio Connections - Digital Audio Output
Panel Audio Cable

Connector Function Comments
Pin XLR Connector Pin Number
Audio A
A Right (return) Continues to provide 3
B Ground analog Audio A as in Audio 1 1
Analog Audio Output. Controlled by “Audio A” in
C Right (live) Configurator, displayed as 2
D Left (return) “Audio A” in Monitor 3
Screens.
B Ground Audio 2 1
E Left (live) 2
Audio B
F Channel 2 + Contains digital Audio B. 3
G Ground Audio 3 1
Controlled by “Audio B” in
H Channel 2 - Configurator, displayed as 2
J Channel 1 + Contains digital Audio A. “Audio B” in Monitor 3
Screens.
G Ground Audio 4 1
K Channel 1 - 2
6.9 Signal Connections

Table 6-4: Signal Connections
The details of the many signal connections on the RXU and RCU
are provided in Table 6-4. Function Connector Notes
RF Input 50 ohm Amplitude should be less than
(RXU only) “N”-type -25dBm. Stronger signals will
overload RXU and degrade system
performance.

Table 6-4: Signal Connections (Continued) installation in an aircraft, where the Remote Control is mounted
in a cockpit instrument panel and the RX is in another
Function Connector Notes compartment.
Monitor 75 ohm BNC Output can be configured to be The RX connects to the Remote Control Panel using a standard
(MON.) either ASI or 70 MHz IF depending null modem cable. One cable is supplied with each Remote
on installed hardware and operating Control Panel ordered. Additional cables can be purchased from
mode chosen. MRC or at any computer or electronics store.
Signal Output 75 ohm BNC Output may be 70 MHz IF, analog
video, digital ASI, or digital SDI For details on installing the Remote Control Panel and
depending on installed hardware connecting it to the RX, refer to the RX Remote Control Panel
and operating mode chosen. Operator’s Guide (part number 400497-1).
70 MHz IF is at 0 dBm.
Signal In 75 ohm BNC Input is 70MHz IF from RXU or 6.10.2 Radio Programming and Monitoring
(RCU only) other RF front end. Input level This is used when programming or monitoring the radio using the
should be -10 dBm. RX Configurator software running on a Windows PC.
When an RXU and an RCU are connected, you need to connect
6.10 Data Connections to only one of their RS-232 connectors. The RXU and RCU will
communicate over the coaxial connection between them, and
Both the RXU and RCU have RS-232 data connections. On the
the Configurator commands will be automatically routed to the
RXU the RS-232 connector is on the rear panel; on the RCU it is
correct unit.
on the front panel.
The RX is configured to be a DTE device. If you need to access
These female DB-9 connectors are used for three purposes:
only the Radio Programming and Monitoring connections, a null
• Remote Control using the STRATA RX Remote Control modem cable can be used to connect the RX to your PC. One
Panel. cable is supplied with each RX ordered. Additional cables can
• Radio Programming and Monitoring using a PC. be purchased from MRC or at any computer or electronics store.
• Wayside Data communication. Radio Programming and Monitoring connections are shown in
Table 6-5 on page 6-22 and Figure 6-30 on page 6-24.
The RX can be connected directly to a PC, or it can be interfaced
to a LAN for applications such as remote monitoring and control. 6.10.3 Wayside Data
6.10.1 Remote Control Overview The Wayside channel is a simplex data channel
transmitting data from the STRATA RX System. See Figure 6-26
The RX can be controlled from a remote location using the on page 6-22.
STRATA RX Remote Control Panel. This is typically used for

Figure 6-26: Wayside Simplex Data Channel - Typical This connection is used for carrying Wayside data from the RX to
RX an external device.
TX The RX System supports an embedded 9.6 kb/sec Wayside data
channel. This channel is available when an MPEG decoder is
WAYSIDE WAYSIDE installed and the radio is in digital mode. Data rates are from
1200 baud to 38,400 baud.
Wayside data connections are shown in Table 6-5 and Figure 6-
30 on page 6-24.
Compatibility MRC has verified that the Wayside channel is
compatible with the following receivers:
• STRATA Receiver Unit (RXU) with MPEG decoding
Table 6-5: RS-232 Panel Connector • STRATA Receiver Control Unit (RCU) with MPEG
decoding.
Pin Function Comments • Tandberg Alteia IRD (Integrated Receiver Decoder)
1 N/C
2 Receive Data Used for communication between 6.10.4 Panel Data Connectors
3 Transmit Data RX and external computer. The pinout of the panel DB-9 connectors is shown in Figure 6-27
4 N/C and Table 6-5, and is illustrated in Figure 6-30 on page 6-24.
5 GND
Figure 6-27: RS-232 Panel Connector
6 N/C
7 Transmit Data Used for carrying Wayside Data DB-9 Male
to external device or PC.
8 Receive Data Not used.
9 N/C
Wayside data from the STRATA RX System is obtained through

the WAYSIDE connector.
1 2 3 4 5
Note that the Wayside data is only present on the RS-232
connector on the unit in which the MPEG decoder is physically 6 7 8 9
located.

6.10.5 Multipurpose Data Cable
This is a custom cable you will have to fabricate. See
In order to access both the Radio and Wayside Data, you will
Figure 6-30 on page 6-24 for the connections on the
need a specially-wired cable. Note that the pinouts used do not
STRATA end.
conform to the standard usage for RS-232 connections.
A wiring diagram for such a Multipurpose Cable is shown in Figure 6-28: Network Connection
Figure 6-31 on page 6-24. The cable itself is shown in Figure 6-
32 on page 6-25. A multipurpose Cable is available from MRC. Ethernet LAN
Note that you may have to modify this design depending on
whether the external equipment using the Wayside Data is Interface
configured to be a DTE device or a DCE device. Cable
6.10.6 Networking STRATA RX UDS-10

The RS-232 port on the STRATA RX can also be connected to a Device Server
network if desired. This allows both monitoring and programming
the STRATA RX from a remote location.
Figure 6-29: Lantronix UDS-10 Device Server
To connect the RX to a network, you will need the items
described below. See Figure 6-28.
• Device Server
There are several types on the market. Also called Serial-
to-Ethernet converters, they take serial RS-232 data and
convert it to the format needed for an Ethernet network.
One type we have used with success is the Lantronix

UDS-10. It accepts data via a DB-25 connector, and
connects to the network via an RJ-45 connector. See
Figure 6-29.
• Interface Cable
This cable needs to connect to the STRATA RX data
connector (DB-9) on one end and connect to the device
server on the other (a DB-25 connector in the case of the
UDS-10).

Figure 6-30: Radio and Wayside Data Connections
Strata RX Data Port

DB9 Male
2 Radio data from external computer
RD Receive Data
3 Radio data to external computer
TD Transmit Data
Radio Data
5
SG Signal Ground
SG
7 Wayside data to external device
Wayside TD Transmit Wayside Data
Data 8 Wayside data from external device - not used
RD Receive Wayside Data
Figure 6-31: Multipurpose Radio and Wayside Data Cable
Cable-mount Cable-mount
DB9 Female DB9 Male
2 2
3 3 Radio Data
5 5
To Radio 7
RS-232 Panel
2
Connector 8
3 Wayside Data
Cable-mount
DB9 Female

Figure 6-32: Multipurpose Radio and Wayside Data Cable
5 9
RADIO (M)
1 6
5
RADIO/ 9
WAYSIDE (F)
6 1
1 6
WAYSIDE (F)
1 9
5
2
3
4
5 RADIO (M)
1 6
RED
2 7
WHT
3 8
4 9
RADIO/WAYSIDE BLK
5
(F) 6 1
WHT 2
7
RED 3
8
9 4
5 WAYSIDE (F)
6
7
8
9

6.11 Powering Up - The power up sequence is normal. See Section 3.3.3
on page 3-10.
When the wiring and mounting are completed, it is time to power 3. If everything appears to be normal, test the
up the RX. As good practice, you should make a final check performance of your RX by setting up a link and
before power is applied. transmitting and receiving video and audio.
6.11.1 Checks before power-up
Here are your final pre-power-up checks: If you have any problems, refer to the “Troubleshooting” chapter
to determine the cause.
• Double check to be sure all the cables are connected to
the correct receptacles.
• Make sure the connections are all fully mated and locked.
6.12 Product Modifications
The product you purchased has been carefully designed and
tested, and is warranted to meet specifications when connected
CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches
and operated as described in this manual.
the power required by the equipment.
Note If you modify a product without authorization from

6.11.2 Initial power-up MRC, you will void the warranty.
Now you are ready to apply power:
For a complete Warranty statement, refer to the Notices section
1. Turn on the power. at the front of this manual.
Remember to turn on the Power Switches on both the

RXU and RCU.
If you are using DC Power on Coax to power the RXU,

be sure the DC On Coax switch on the RCU is set to
ON. Also check the Monitor Screens to be sure the RX
is configured for DC ON COAX to be ON.
2. Check to see that:

- The front panel displays are working.
- The front panel LEDs illuminate.

7 Repair
Business Hours: Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 7:00PM Eastern Time (US)
7.1 Chapter Overview (0800 - 1900 hrs US ET)
This chapter covers repairs to the STRATA RX, including which Telephone: 800-490-5700 (Press 4)
repairs can be done safely in the field and which should only be 978-671-5700 (Press 4)
performed at the MRC factory or an authorized repair depot.
Fax: 978-671-5948
7.2 Supported Repairs E-mail: technicalsupport@mrcbroadcast.com

After regular business hours and on weekends and holidays, you
The Strata RX System (including the RXU and RCU) is designed can also reach our expert staff as follows:
to be compact, rugged and reliable.
Telephone: 978-671-5929
Both the RXU and RCU require specialized test equipment to
calibrate amplitude and frequency characteristics after repair. In
addition, sealing the enclosure after repair requires exacting Your call will be automatically forwarded to the on-call Technical
techniques and special fixtures to ensure its weather resistance. Support Specialist.
Therefore, there are NO supported field repairs to either the
RXU or RCU. When contacting Technical Support, please have the following
Return the entire unit for factory repair. information available:
If you attempt field repair you risk damaging your radio. If - Sales order number
the radio is under warranty, you may also affect your warranty - Model number and serial number of the unit
coverage. - Approximate purchase date
- Firmware version, which appears on the RXU or RCU
7.3 Calling for Service alphanumeric display at startup
MRC Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a - OR -
week. During regular business hours you can reach our expert • Firmware versions displayed on the Main page of the
staff directly. After hours, your call will be forwarded to the on-call STRATA RX Configuration Utility, when the STRATA RX
technical support specialist. Configuration Utility is connected to the RXU or RCU.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Repair 7-1

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Repair 7-2

8 Replacement Parts Table 8-1: STRATA RX Cables
Description Comments
Null Modem Cable Connects RS-232 port on RX to PC. For
8.1 Chapter Overview Programming and Monitoring Data only. See
Section 6.10 on page 6-21.
This chapter describes which replacement parts are available for
Multipurpose Data Connects RS-232 port on RX to PC. For both
the STRATA RX System.
Cable Programming and Monitoring data, and
Since there are no supported field repairs on the RXU or Wayside data. See Section 6.10 on page 6-
RCU. The only parts available are external cables and 21.
mounting hardware. RF Connection Connects Signal Output of RXU to Signal
Cable Input of RCU.
8.2 External Cables
The external cables for the STRATA RX are listed in Table 8-1. If
you need something that is not listed, ask your Sales
Representative or consult the factory.
Table 8-1: STRATA RX Cables
Description Comments
AC Power Cable Provides AC Main Power to the ACU Power
Supply.
DC Power Cable Connects the RXU or RCU to the ACU
Power Supply. Connectors on both ends.
Power Input Connector only.
Connector
Audio Output Cable Splits output from AUDIO connector into 4
XLR connectors. See Section 6.8 on page 6-
16.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Replacement Parts 8-1

8.3 Mounting Hardware
The mounting hardware for the STRATA RX is listed inTable 8-2.
If you need something that is not listed, ask your Sales
Representative or consult the factory.
Table 8-2: STRATA RX Mounting Hardware
Description Part Number Comments

Antenna Lock Plate 841199-1 For attaching MRC
antenna directly to RF
Input of RXU.
Universal Mounting 907516-1 For mounting to a tripod.
Bracket Each bracket accepts 1
unit (RXU or RCU).
Aircraft Mounting 907739-1 For mounting in an aircraft
Bracket instrument panel. Each
bracket accepts 2 units
(RCU and RXU). Includes
bracket, mounting
hardware.
Fixed Mounting 907211-1 For mounting to a floor or
Bracket bulkhead. Each bracket
accepts 2 units (RCU and
RXU). Bracket only.
Quick Release 907559-1 For mounting on a tripod.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Replacement Parts 8-2

9 Theory of Operation or the RCU depending on your needs.
The main STRATA RX System functional groups are shown in
Figure 9-1 on page 9-2. They are as follows:
9.1 Chapter Overview • RF Front End
- Low Noise Block Down-Converter
This chapter provides technical details about the design and
functioning of the STRATA RX System. This chapter is intended - Low Noise Converter
to complement information contained in “Product Description” on • AGC/IF
page 2-1.
• IF Interface + Switching
The descriptions in this chapter will assume you are already
• Demodulation and Decoding
familiar with all the information in “Product Description” on
page 2-1. We recommend you review that chapter before - COFDM Demodulator
beginning to read this one. - MPEG Decoder
Here are the topics covered: - FM Receiver (FMR)
• Distribution, Command and Control (DCC)
Topic Page • DC-to-DC Power Supply

System Architecture 9-1 The details of these functional groups and system components
are discussed in the sections that follow.
RF Front End 9-3
AGC/IF Module 9-9 More details about the system configurations available, and
about which system components can be located in the RXU and
Switch and IF Interface 9-9
Module the RCU, are found in “Product Description” on page 2-1.
Demodulation and Decoding 9-12
Distribution, Command and 9-13
Control
9.2 System Architecture

The STRATA RX system is designed around a flexible, modular
architecture. The system components can be located in the RXU
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Theory of Operation 9-1

Figure 9-1: STRATA RX System Architecture
RF Front End Demodulation and Decoding
Switched Outputs -
IF/Video/Audio
Low Noise
Block Down Low Noise
Converter (LNB) Converter (LNC) AGC/IF
RF
In Switch COFDM MPEG Decoder
+ Demodulator
IF ASI
AUX
Interface
2 GHz 900 MHz 70 MHz MON.
FMR
Control and Distribution

RS-232 Data
DC-DC Power Supply
External
DC Power
In

9.3 RF Front End signals, and the difference between them. The difference signal
will be the desired 2 GHz.
The RF Front End is responsible for receiving the incoming RF
Finally the 2.0 - 2.7 GHz signal is Low Pass Filtered to remove
signal (either analog or digital) and converting it to 900 MHz for
the signal representing the sum of the two MIxer signals.
the AGC/IF module.
The LNB differs from the LNC in that its output is not 900 MHz,
The RF Front End is designed around two main modules: the
but 2 GHz. This 2 GHz is then applied to the “AUX” input of the
Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB, also called the BDC),
2 GHz LNC, which produces 900 MHz.
and the Low Noise Converter (LNC). These two modules are
used separately or together to cover the various Bands. Band-Switched LNB For applications where the radio will be
able to switch between 2 GHz and some other Band, there is a
9.3.1 Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB) specific version of the LNB that incorporates Band Switching.
The LNB operates by mixing a Local Oscillator (LO) signal with The block diagram is shown in Figure 9-3 on page 9-5.
the incoming RF signal, and producing a 2.0 - 2.7 GHz signal. This version of the LNB incorporates a switch on the input that
This 2 GHz signal is then fed to the LNC for conversion to 900 allows bypassing the LNB entirely when the radio is operating on
MHz. the 2 GHz Band.This switch is controlled in tandem with the
The block diagram is shown in Figure 9-2 on page 9-4. switch in the 2 GHz LNC, so the LNB output is routed through
the correct signal path in the 2 GHz LNC.
Incoming Signal The incoming signal is amplified by a Low
Noise Amplifier (LNA) and sent along to the Mixer. Depending on
the Band on which the LNB is operating, there may also be band
9.3.2 Low Noise Converter (LNC)
pass filters either before the amplifier, or after. The LNC operates in a similar fashion to the LNB. The LNC
mixes a Local Oscillator (LO) signal with the incoming RF signal,
Local Oscillator The Local Oscillator (LO) generates a lower
and produces the 900 MHz signal.
frequency using a crystal-controlled digital synthesizer. The base
frequency is set by the crystal, and the synthesizer allows the The block diagram is shown in Figure 9-4 on page 9-6.
output frequency to be varied. Incoming Signal The incoming signal is amplified by a Low
This output frequency is then passed it through a multiplier to Noise Amplifier (LNA) and sent along to the Mixer. Depending on
raise its frequency to one that is exactly 2 GHz away from the the Band on which the LNC is operating, there may also be band
incoming signal. Depending on the Band, this frequency may be pass filters either before the amplifier, or after.
either 2 GHz lower or 2 GHz higher than the incoming signal. Local Oscillator The Local Oscillator (LO) generates a lower
This signal is filtered to reduce spurious signals before being frequency using a crystal-controlled digital synthesizer. The base
applied to the Mixer. frequency is set by the crystal, and the synthesizer allows the
Mixer In the Mixer, the incoming signal is mixed with the LO output frequency to be varied.
signal, resulting in two mixer outputs: the sum of the input

Figure 9-2: Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB)
2 GHz
LOW NOISE
CONVERTER
LOW NOISE LOW PASS
FILTER (LNC)
AMPLIFIER MIXER AMPLIFIER
(LNA)
RF
INPUT
AUX
900 MHz
2 GHz
OUT
BAND PASS
LOCAL AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER FILTER
OSCILLATOR

Figure 9-3: Band Switched LNB
2 GHz
LOW NOISE
CONVERTER
LOW NOISE LOW PASS (LNC)
AMPLIFIER MIXER AMPLIFIER FILTER
RF (LNA)
RF
INPUT
AUX
BAND PASS
FILTER
900 MHz
2 GHz
OUT
BAND PASS
LOCAL AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER FILTER
OSCILLATOR

Figure 9-4: Low Noise Converter (LNC)
LOW PASS
MIXER AMPLIFIER
LOW NOISE FILTER
AMPLIFIER
RF (LNA)
INPUT
900 MHz
OUT
LOCAL BAND PASS

AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER FILTER
OSCILLATOR

This output frequency is then passed it through a multiplier to Figure 9-5: Lower Bands Configuration
raise its frequency to one that is exactly 900 MHz away from the
incoming signal. Depending on the Band, this frequency may be
either 900 MHz lower or 900 MHz higher than the incoming RF In 900 MHz Out
signal. This signal is filtered to reduce spurious signals before LNC
being applied to the Mixer.
Mixer In the Mixer, the incoming signal is mixed with the LO
signal, resulting in two mixer outputs: the sum of the input
signals, and the difference between them. The difference signal
will be the desired 900 MHz. 2 GHz Band For the 2 GHz Band, the two-input version of the
Finally the 900 MHz signal is Low Pass Filtered to remove the LNC is used. When receiving 2 GHz, the RF is applied to the RF
signal representing the sum of the two MIxer signals. Input of the LNC. The AUX input is not used.
2 GHz LNC One specific version of the LNC is the 2GHz LNC. No other modules are needed in the Front End. See Figure 9-6.
The 2 GHz LNC differs in that it has two inputs - one for incoming
2 GHz RF, and an “AUX” input for accepting 2 GHz from a Low Figure 9-6: 2 GHz Configuration
Noise Block Down Converter (LNB). The inputs are selectable, 2 GHz In
and are amplified or filtered as needed depending on the signal 900 MHz Out
RF In
source.
LNC
The block diagram is shown in Figure 9-7 on page 9-8. AUX In
9.3.3 Band-Specific RF Architecture

The LNB is used alone, or together with the LNC, depending on
which Band is to be received. Higher Bands For the higher frequency bands, the RF signal is
Lower Bands For the lower frequency bands, the incoming RF applied to a Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB), which
is applied directly to the Low Noise Converter (LNC), which converts the signal to 2 GHz and passes it to the 2 GHz LNC.
converts the signal to 900 MHz as described in Section 9.3.2 on The 2 GHz LNC converts the signal to 900 MHz. For some
page 9-3. bands there may be a special LNB that incorporates its own
LNC. These special LNBs therefore would accept the RF signal
No other modules are needed in the Front End. See Figure 9-5. and convert it directly to 900 MHz. See Figure 9-8 on page 9-9.

Figure 9-7: Low Noise Converter (LNC)
LOW NOISE
AMPLIFIER
(LNA)
RF
INPUT
LOW PASS LOW PASS

FILTER MIXER AMPLIFIER
FILTER
900 MHz
AUX OUT
INPUT
LOW PASS
FILTER
LOCAL BAND PASS

AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER
OSCILLATOR FILTER

Figure 9-8: Higher Bands Configuration Figure 9-9: Band Switched Configuration
RF In RF In 2 GHz
LNB RF In 2 GHz
LNC
RF In 2 GHz
AUX In LNB
LNC
High AUX In
Bands
2 GHz 900 MHz
Out 2 GHz 900 MHz
Out
RF In
LNB + LNC 9.4 AGC/IF Module
The AGC/IGF module performs several tasks:
900 MHz • Converts the incoming 900 MHz signal to 70 MHz.
Out • Maintains AGC (automatic gain control) over the input
signal.
• Provides a calibrated RCL (received carrier level) front
Band Switched
panel display.
Certain combinations of a higher band and 2 GHz can be
• Provides receiver squelch control in IF and Analog
ordered together in a band-switched configuration. Consult your
modes.
Sales Representative or contact the factory for the latest band
availability.
When operated in the higher band, the RF first passes through 9.5 Switch and IF Interface Module
the LNB, which converts it to 2 GHz. This is then passed to the The STRATA RX provides a very high degree of operator control
AUX Input of the 2 GHz LNC, which converts it to 900 MHz. over inputs and outputs. All of this flexibility is managed by the
When operated in the 2 GHz band, the LNB is bypassed and the Switch and IF Interface Module.
2 GHz RF signal is coupled directly into the RF Input of the 2 The Switch and IF Interface Module is responsible for routing all
GHz LNC. See Figure 9-9. the signals handled by the RX. This includes both input and

output signals to and from their connectors, and internal signals This overall signal routing is illustrated schematically in Figure 9-
to and from the RX modules. 10.
Figure 9-10: IF and Video Switching

IF, FM,
IF, SDI, CV, ASI
COFDM IF, ASI
Signal Out Signal In Monitor
IF Interface
Audio Out
IF Switching/Logic Circuit
IF In
IF In Audio C Video SDI Audio C Video
FM Receiver COFDM
Demod
MPEG Decoder
ASI Out ASI In

9.5.1 Monitor and Output Switching which permits configuring the receiver to provide either analog or
digital audio outputs. Figure 9-12 shows a block diagram of the
The STRATA RX allows the operator to choose the signal that
MPEG decoder audio output circuitry.
appears at the Monitor (MON.) connector, and the signal that
appears at the Signal Out connector.
Figure 9-12: MPEG Audio Switching
This is represented schematically in Figure 9-11.
ASI Input
From
Figure 9-11: Monitor and Signal Out Switching COFDM ANA Analog or Digital
Aud B audio Audio Outputs
Demodulator DIG
FMR Analog Audio

Aud A audio Outputs
70 MHz
IF
IF COFDM MPEG
DEMOD DECODER
MPEG DECODER
ASI Out SDI Out CV Out
IF
SDI
MPEG Decoder + FM Receiver If desired, the RCU can
IF ASI
CV
contain both an MPEG Decoder and an FM Receiver (FMR).
ASI
This circuit provides analog FM receiver video and audio
IF
demodulation functions for either NTSC or PAL video formats
(must be specified when ordering).
When the FMR circuit is installed in an RCU housing along with
the COFDM/MPEG option, an audio switching circuit is added
Monitor Signal Out
which accommodates audio output switching between digital and
analog operating modes. See Figure 9-13 on page 9-12 for
details of the RCU audio switching circuit.
Note that when the STRATA RCU or RXU is operated in the
9.5.2 Audio Switching digital mode, the MPEG decoder audio outputs may be
configured for analog or digital audio outputs as shown in
The STRATA RX provides analog and/or digital audio outputs.
How this works depends on whether there is an MPEG Decoder
installed, or an FM Receiver, or both. Also note that the audio output wiring configuration differs
between analog and digital audio circuits. See ”Audio
MPEG Decoder When the MPEG decoder circuit is used, a
Connections” on page 6-16 for more details.
flexible analog and/or digital audio switching circuit is provided

Figure 9-13: FMR/MPEG Audio Switching FEC, GI, Chroma, and Spectral Inversion. Only the COFDM
bandwidth (6, 7 or 8 MHz) and the receive channel/frequency
need to be specified by the operator.
IF Interface In addition to demodulating the received COFDM (IF) signal, the
Aud B audio COFDM Demodulator microprocessor automatically locks to the
received digital signal and provides important signal
Aud A audio performance measurements such as
FMR FMR • RCL (Received Carrier Level)
• LQ (Link Quality)
MPEG
ANA • BER (Bit Error Ratio)

Aud B audio DIG
• SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio).
Aud A audio The signal performance measurements are made available to
Audio
MPEG Decoder Output
the user on a real-time basis, either via the RCU and/or RXU
front panel displays, or by connecting a PC to the STRATA RX
RS-232 serial port and running the STRATA RX Configurator
Utility (Configurator) software.
In addition, LQ and RCL are available through the STRATA RX
Remote Control.
9.6 Demodulation and Decoding
The STRATA RX can provide either analog demodulation, using 9.6.2 MPEG Decoder Circuit
the FM Receiver, or digital demodulation and decoding, using The STRATA RX MPEG decoder circuit accepts a digital ASI
the COFDM Demodulator and MPEG Decoder. signal from the COFDM demodulator and recovers the
compressed video (NTSC or PAL) and/or audio signals. Both
9.6.1 COFDM Demodulator analog and digital (AES-EBU) audio signals are available at the
This module contains the Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division RCU or RXU Audio Output connector.
Multiplexing (COFDM) demodulation circuitry. Additional features provided by the MPEG Decoder include a 9.6
The COFDM Demodulator automatically detects the key kb/sec serial data Wayside data channel and optional BISS
modulation parameters of the incoming signal and configures decryption capabilities.
itself accordingly. These parameters include modulation type,

9.7 Distribution, Command and
Control
The Distribution, Command and Control circuits are responsible
for external and internal communications as well as for
distributing the required DC supply voltages.
The RCU and RXU power supplies accept a wide range of DC
input voltages (+10.5 to +36 volts). The supplies convert the
input to the DC voltages required by the rest of the RX hardware.
The converted DC is controlled and distributed by the Control
and Distribution circuit.
The Command and Control circuits handle communications
between the RXU and RCU, and between the RX and external
control equipment such as a PC.
On-board microprocessors manage the overall system
configuration and operation of all modules to which they are
connected, i.e., MPEG/COFDM, FMR, RF/IF, etc.
For those applications that employ both an RCU and RXU, a
communications link is superimposed on the IF coaxial cable
connecting the RXU and RCU. This allows the RCU and RXU to
control each other’s operation and thus permits controlling the
entire RX system from either unit’s front panel. It also permits
controlling the entire system from either unit’s RS-232 connector,
using the Configurator software.


Channels & Frequencies A.2 Initial Factory Presets
A This section lists the channels and frequencies for each RF band
covered by the STRATA RX. These frequencies are preset at the
factory, but can be modified using the Configurator software.
A.1 Appendix Overview
This Appendix presents the channels and frequencies that were Note These frequency settings should only be changed
programmed into your STRATA RX at the factory. It also by qualified technical personnel.
provides the frequencies set by the latest US frequency
reallocation plan. Contact the Society of Broadcast Engineers (SBE) coordinator
Here are the topics covered: for up-to-date information on local frequency plans for Electronic
News Gathering (ENG) and Remote Pickup (RPU) operations.
Topic Page
Initial Factory Presets A-1
2 GHz (Lower) Channel Plan A-2
2 GHz (Upper) Channel Plan A-2
3 GHz Channel Plan A-3
7 GHz (Lower) Channel Plan A-4
7 GHz (Upper) Channel Plan A-4
US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz A-6
Channel Plan
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Channels & Frequencies A-1

Table A-1: 2 GHz (Lower) Channel Plan Table A-2: 2 GHz (Upper) Channel Plan
(-) Offset (0) Center (+) Offset (-) Offset (0) Center (+) Offset
Channel Channel
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1 1994.750 1999.000 2003.250 1 2300.000 2313.333 2326.666
2 2012.250 2016.500 2020.750 2 2339.999 2353.332 2366.665
3 2029.250 2033.500 2037.750 3 2379.998 2393.331 2406.664
4 2046.250 2050.500 2054.750 4 2419.997 2433.330 2446.663
5 2063.250 2067.500 2071.750 5 2459.996 2473.329 2486.662
6 2080.250 2084.500 2088.750 6 2499.995 2513.328 2526.661
7 2097.250 2101.500 2105.750 7 2539.994 2553.327 2566.660
8 2454.250 2458.500 2462.750 8 2579.993 2593.326 2606.659
9 2471.250 2475.500 2479.750 9 2619.992 2633.325 2646.658
10 2487.750 2492.000 2496.250 10 2659.991 2673.324 2686.657
11 --- --- --- 11 --- --- ---
12 --- --- --- 12 --- --- ---
13 --- --- --- 13 --- --- ---
14 --- --- --- 14 --- --- ---

Table A-3: 3 GHz Channel Plan Table A-4: 5 GHz Channel Plan
Channel Channel
1 3406.250 3418.250 3431.250 1 4450.000 4475.000 4500.000
2 3443.250 3455.250 3467.250 2 4525.000 4550.000 4575.000
3 3480.250 3492.250 3504.250 3 4600.000 4625.000 4650.000
4 3506.250 3518.750 3531.250 4 4675.000 4700.000 4725.000
5 3543.750 3556.250 3568.750 5 4750.000 4775.000 4800.000
6 3581.250 3593.750 3606.250 6 4825.000 4850.000 4875.000
7 3610.000 3620.000 3630.000 7 4900.000 4925.000 4925.000
8 3640.000 3650.000 3660.000 8 4940.500 4941.500 4942.500
9 3670.000 3680.000 3690.000 9 4943.500 4944.500 4944.500
10 3700.000 3710.000 3720.000 10 4947.500 4952.500 4957.500
11 3730.000 3740.000 3750.000 11 4962.500 4967.500 4972.500
12 3760.000 3770.000 3780.000 12 4977.500 4982.500 4982.500
13 3790.000 3800.000 3800.000 13 4985.500 4986.500 4987.500
14 3800.000 3800.000 3800.000 14 4988.500 4989.500 4989.500

Table A-5: 7 GHz (Lower) Channel Plan Table A-6: 7 GHz (Upper) Channel Plan
Channel Channel
1 6881.250 6887.500 6893.750 1 6900.000 6914.285 6928.570
2 6906.250 6912.500 6918.750 2 6942.855 6957.140 6971.425
3 6931.250 6937.500 6943.750 3 6985.710 6999.995 7014.280
4 6956.250 6962.500 6968.750 4 7028.565 7042.850 7057.135
5 6981.250 6987.500 6993.750 5 7071.420 7085.705 7099.990
6 7006.250 7012.500 7018.750 6 7114.275 7128.560 7142.845
7 7031.250 7037.500 7043.750 7 7157.130 7171.415 7185.700
8 7056.250 7062.500 7068.750 8 7199.985 7214.270 7228.555
9 7081.250 7087.500 7093.750 9 7242.840 7257.125 7271.410
10 7106.750 7112.500 7118.750 10 7285.695 7299.980 7314.265
11 6431.250 6437.500 6443.750 11 7328.550 7342.835 7357.120
12 6456.250 6462.500 6468.750 12 7371.405 7385.690 7399.975
13 6481.250 6487.500 6493.750 13 7414.260 7428.545 7442.830
14 6506.250 6512.500 6518.750 14 7457.115 7471.400 7485.685

Table A-7: 8 GHz Channel Plan Table A-8: 10 GHz Channel Plan
Channel Channel
1 7700.000 7716.666 7733.332 1 10000.00 10016.66 10033.33
2 7749.998 7766.664 7783.330 2 10049.99 10066.66 10083.33
3 7799.996 7816.662 7833.328 3 10099.99 10116.66 10133.32
4 7849.994 7866.660 7883.326 4 10149.99 10166.66 10183.32
5 7899.992 7916.658 7933.324 5 10199.99 10216.65 10233.32
6 7949.990 7966.656 7983.322 6 10249.99 10266.65 10283.32
7 7999.988 8016.654 8033.320 7 10299.98 10316.65 10333.32
8 8049.986 8066.652 8083.318 8 10349.98 10366.65 10383.31
9 8099.984 8116.650 8133.316 9 10399.98 10416.65 10433.31
10 8149.982 8166.648 8183.314 10 10449.98 10466.64 10483.31
11 8199.980 8216.646 8233.312 11 10499.98 10516.64 10533.31
12 8249.978 8266.644 8283.310 12 10549.97 10566.84 10583.31
13 8299.976 8316.642 8333.308 13 10599.97 10616.64 10633.30
14 8349.974 8366.640 8383.306 14 10649.97 10666.64 10683.30

Information below was obtained from the FCC Web site,
Table A-9: 13 GHz Channel Plan document # FCC 03-280:
http://hraunfoss.fcc.gov/edocs_public/attachmatch/FCC-03-
(-) Offset (0) Center (+) Offset 280A1.pdf
Channel
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1 12700.00 12713.09 12726.19
Table A-10: 2 GHz Band - US 12 MHz Channel Plan
2 12739.28 12752.38 12765.47
3 12778.57 12791.66 12804.76 (-) Offset (0) Center (+) Offset
Channel
4 12817.85 12830.95 12844.04 (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
5 12857.14 12870.23 12883.33 1 2028.500 2031.500 2034.500
6 12896.42 12909.52 12922.61
2 2040.500 2043.500 2046.500
7 12935.71 12948.80 12961.90
3 2052.500 2055.500 2058.500
8 12974.99 12988.09 13001.18
4 2064.500 2067.500 2070.500
9 13014.28 13027.37 13040.47
5 2076.500 2079.500 2082.500
10 13053.56 13066.66 13079.75
6 2088.500 2091.500 2094.500
11 13092.85 13105.94 13119.04
12 13132.13 13145.23 13158.32
7 2100.500 2103.500 2106.500
13 13717.42 13184.51 13197.61 8 2454.250 2458.500 2465.750
14 13210.70 13223.80 13236.89 9 2471.250 2475.500 2479.750
10 2487.750 2492.000 2496.250
A.3 US 2 GHz Reallocation - 12 MHz

Channel Plan
Here are the frequencies that will be used on the 2 GHz band in
the new US 12 MHz channel plan. Your STRATA RX System is
pre-programmed with the frequencies listed in Section A.2 on
page A-1. However, as your station migrates to the new channel
plan, you can easily reprogram your STRATA RX using the
Configurator software.

B Glossary Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued)
8QAM 8-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
This section describes acronyms and abbreviations used in The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70
MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the
communications, broadcasting, and in MRC Products and
amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency
documentation.
constant. There are 8 possible combinations of
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry
information.
Table B-1: Useful Terms
1RU 1 Rack Unit
16QAM 16-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation The signal (video+audio) is imposed onto the 70 MHz
carrier by varying both the phase and the amplitude
The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70 of the signal while keeping the frequency constant.
MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the There are 64 possible combinations of phase and
amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency amplitude that can be used to carry information.
constant. There are 16 possible combinations of A&C Alarm and Control
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry ABW Automatic Bandwidth detection
information.
ACU AC to DC Converter Unit
ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
The signal (video + audio) is imposed onto the 70 AES Audio Engineering Society
MHz carrier by varying both the phase and the AES/EBU Unofficial name for a digital audio standard
amplitude of the signal while keeping the frequency developed as a joint enterprise of the AES and the
constant. There are 32 possible combinations of EBU.
phase and amplitude that can be used to carry
information. AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AGC Automatic Gain Control
4 FSK 4-state Frequency Shift Keying AIS Alarm Indication Signal (all one’s)
8 PSK 8-Phase Shift Keying AMI Alternate Mark Inversion, line code format for traffic
data.
AVG Average
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Glossary B-1

Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued) Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued)
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface BISS-1 BISS encryption that uses a fixed key.
BISS-E BISS encryption that uses an encrypted key.
A serial communications interface operating at
270 Mbit/sec., generally used in field news-gathering BNC Bayonet lock coaxial connector
operations. BPF Band Pass Filter
ASYNC Asynchronous bps or b/sec Bits per second
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
Digital communication in which there is no timing
requirement for transmission and in which the start of BW Bandwidth
each character is individually signaled by the CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
transmitting device. Committee
Baseband A composite signal in which video and audio signals
are combined together, with video occupying A telecommunications standardizing committee of
approximately 0-4.5 MHz and audio modulated onto the ITU.
subcarriers in the 5-6 MHz range. Also called CCPS Command & Control Power Supply
Composite. CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical
BB Baseband Standardization
BDC Block Down Converter CNR Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
BER Bit Error Ratio COFDM Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
Composite A band or grouping of frequencies and/or subcarriers,
The ratio of bits containing errors to the total number (Baseband) including video, occupied by the signal in a radio
of bits in the signal, over a time period. transmission system. Also called Baseband.
BiasT A type of interconnection between the IDU and the CR4 Code Runner 4
ODU. In Bias T wiring, IF and DC are combined and
CSI Channel-State Information
carried on the coax cable up the ODU; blocking
circuitry prevents the DC from entering the IDU. CV Composite Video
BISS Basic Interoperable Scrambling System
Video signal in which the chrominance (color) and
luminance (brightness) information are combined in
A means of encrypting and decrypting a digital signal
one signal. S-Video separates the chrominance and
to prevent unauthorized reception. The encryption
luminance into individual signals.
and decryption are controlled by a digital key, which
is shared at both the transmitting and receiving CW Carrier Wave
location. DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting

dB Decibel DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcasting - Asynchronous Serial
A logarithmic measurement of power or voltage, Interface
applied to audio and RF signals.
dBm A unit of measurement referenced to one milliwatt. A widely-used MPEG-2 digital transport interface.
DCC Distribution Command and Control Physically the connection is made either with optical
fiber or 75 ohm coax with a BNC connector. Interface
DCE Data Communications Equipment
can support data rates up to 270 Mb/sec.
A device that communicates with a DTE device. In DVB-C Digital Video Broadcasting - Cable
practical terms, the DCE is usually a modem and the DVB-S Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite
DTE device is usually a computer. DVB-T Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial
De- Reducing the amplitude of high frequency E1 2.048 Mbps data rate.
emphasis components of an analog audio signal. Done on the
receive end of an analog link to take out Emphasis E3 34.368 Mbps data rate
added on the transmit side. EIA Electronic Industries Association
DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
An industry association that establishes various
DMUX, Demultiplexer standards.
DEMUX
EBU European Broadcasting Union
DQPSK Differential Quadrature (Quaternary) Phase-Shift
Keying In addition to other activities, EBU produces technical
DRL Data Return Link statements and recommendations for PAL television
DS3 Digital Signal 3 systems.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility.
44.736 Mbps data rate. Emphasis Boosting the amplitude of high frequency
DTE Data Terminal Equipment components of an analog audio signal. Done on the
transmit side of an analog link to improve signal-to-
A device that communicates with a DCE device. In noise ratio.
practical terms, the DTE is usually a computer and ENG Electronic News Gathering
the DCE device is usually a modem.
ERRS Errors
Duplex A channel capable of transmitting information
simultaneously in both directions. ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ET Eastern Time (US) IF Intermediate Frequency
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute IMD Inter-Modulation Distortion
EVM Error Vector Magnitude I/O Input/Output
FCC Federal Communications Commission IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder
IRE 1. Institute of Radio Engineers, an international
The United State's communications regulatory professional radio engineering association that
agency. establishes various standards.
FDM Frequency Division Multiplexing 2. A unit of measurement, established by the IRE, in
FEC Forward Error Corrections which 1 IRE Unit =.00714 volts peak-to-peak (Vp-p)
and 140 IRE units equals 1 Vp-p.
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
ISI Inter-Symbol Interference
FIFO First In, First Out buffer
ISO International Standards Organization
FIR Finite Impulse Response
kbps Kilobits per second
FMT FM Video Modulator or FM Transmitter
kHz Kilo (1,000) cycles per second
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
LAN Local Area Network
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
LBO Line Build Out
FW Firmware
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
GHz Gigahertz (109 cycles per second)
Lcl Local
GI Guard Interval
LED Light Emitting Diode
GND Ground
LIU Line Interface Unit
GUI Graphic User Interface
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 line code format for traffic
LNB Low Noise Block Down Converter
data.
LNC Low Noise Converter
HPF High Pass Filter
LO Local Oscillator
HPU High Power Unit
LOS Loss of Signal
H/W or HW Hardware
LPF Low Pass Filter
ICI Inter-Carrier Interference
LQ Link Quality
ID Identification
MaxRC Maximal Ratio Combining
IDU Indoor Unit

Mbps Megabits per second ODU Outdoor Unit
MER Modulation Error Ratio OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
MHz Million (1,000,000) cycles per second OOK On-Off Keying
MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group PAL Phase Alteration Line
M-QAM M-order of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Color television standard used in many European
MRC Microwave Radio Communications countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of resolution.
Multipath An unpredictable set of reflections and/or direct Not compatible with NTSC or SECAM.
waves, each with its own degree of attenuation and PAL-M Phase Alteration Line
delay. Due to obstacles and reflectors in the wireless
channel, transmitted signals arrive at the received Color television standard used in many European
from various directions over multiple paths. countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of resolution
MUX Multiplexer with 50 lines per field. Not compatible with NTSC or
NC Normally Closed (Relay or switch contacts) SECAM.
N/C No Connection PAL-N Phase Alteration Line
NICAM Near-Instantaneous Companding and Multiplexing
Color television standard used in many European
NO Normally Open (Relay or switch contacts) countries. Provides 525 horizontal lines of resolution
NRZ Non-Return-to-Zero (Modulation) with 60 lines per field. Not compatible with NTSC or
SECAM.
NTSC National Television System Committee
PC Personal Computer
Color television standard used in the US. Provides PCR Program Clock Reference
525 horizontal lines of resolution. Not compatible with
PER Parity Error Rate
PAL or SECAM.
ØLK Phase Lock
Null modem An RS-232 cable designed to connect two computers
cable (or other data sources) together. It has male DB9 PID Program Identification
connectors on each end, to mate with the DB9 PLL Phase Lock Loop
female connectors on the PCs. It also has the PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
Transmit and Receive connections crossed over so
Transmit (pin 3) on one end connects to Receive (pin QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
2) on the other.
Also called “Crossover Cable”.

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying SDI Synchronous Digital Interface
The signal (video+audio) is imposed onto the 70 MHz A serial communications interface operating at
carrier by varying the phase of the signal while 270 Mbit/sec. Generally used for in-studio news
keeping the amplitude and frequency constant. There operations.
are 4 possible values of phase that can be used to SECAM Sequence de Couleur Avec Memoire
carry information.
RCL Received Carrier Level Color television standard used in France, Russia,
and other countries. Provides 625 horizontal lines of
The strength of a received RF signal, in dBm. resolution. Not compatible with NTSC or PAL. Not
RCU Receiver Control Unit supported by this product.
Rcvr Receiver SER Symbol Error Rate
RD Receive Data Setpt Set point
RDS Radio Data System SFN Single-Frequency Network
RF Radio Frequency SG Signal Ground
RF Level RF Power from the transmitter. SI Service Information
RFU Radio Frequency Unit Simplex A channel capable of transmitting information in only
one direction.
RMA Return Material Authorization
Site ID A physical location where any number of modems,
R-S Reed-Solomon
transmitters, or receivers are installed.
RSSI Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
RX Receiver
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
RXU Receiver Unit
SR16 Symbol Rate 16
RZ Return to Zero
STDBY Standby
SC Service Channel
Subcarrier An electromagnetic signal that is used as a medium
SC Single Carrier for placing an information channel above another
SCM Single Carrier Modem information channel.
SD EMB Synchronous Digital Interface Embedded

Table B-1: Useful Terms (Continued)
S-Video Video signal in which the chrominance (color) and
luminance (brightness) information are separated
into individual subcarrier signals. Also called Y/C
Video. Composite Video combines them into one
signal.
S/W or SW Software
SYNTH Synthesizer
T1 1.544 Mbps data rate
TC Transmitter Control
TCU Transmitter Control Unit
TD Transmit Data
TX Transmitter
TXU Transmitter Unit
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator
VDC Volts Direct Current
VF Voice Frequency
Video A term pertaining to the bandwidth and spectrum of
the signal that results from television scanning and
which is used to reproduce a picture.
WAN Wide Area Network
XMIT Transmit
Xmtr Transmitter
Y/C Video signal in which the chrominance (color) and
luminance (brightness) information are separated
into individual subcarrier signals. Also called S-
Video. Composite Video combines them into one
signal.


C Configurator Reference Note When operating with the STRATA RX System
connected to the Configurator software, the
STRATA RX System must be powered up prior to
launching the Configurator software.
C.1 Appendix Overview
This appendix provides detailed information on how to install and The Configurator software also allows you to monitor the status
operate the STRATA RX Configuration Utility (Configurator) of your STRATA RX System while connected to the software.
software.
The topics covered in this Appendix are listed below. C.3 Working With the Configurator
Topic Page This section provides details of how to interact with the
Configurator Overview C-1 Configurator software and its tabs, pages, buttons, menus, etc.
Working With the Configurator C-1 Here are the topics covered:
Configurator Pages C-9 Topic Page
Front Panel vs. Configurator C-34 Windows, Tabs, Pages, Buttons, C-1
PC Requirements C-34 and Menus
Installing the Configurator C-34 Graphical User Interface Options C-6
STRATA RX Configuration Utility C-36 Load and Program Options C-7
Troubleshooting
Configurator Compatibility C-42 C.3.1 Windows, Tabs, Pages, Buttons, and
Menus
C.2 Configurator Overview The Configurator software has an easy-to-use Graphical User
Interface (GUI). The settings are grouped into pages according
The STRATA RX Configuration Utility is a Windows-based
to function. The pages are accessed using tabs along the
software application that enables you to control settings on your
bottom of the screen. Pages also contain option buttons, pull-
STRATA RX System and to tailor them exactly to your needs.
down menus, text boxes, radio buttons, and check boxes to
Radio and channel plan settings can only be configured on-line select or activate different functions and options.
with the Configurator software connected to the STRATA RX
Here are the topics covered:
System through an RS-232 link. Radio and channel plan
configuration settings can be saved to a file and can recalled
later.
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Configurator Reference C-1

Figure C-1: Main Window - Typical
Topic Page
Windows C-2
Tabs C-3
Greyed-Out Tabs C-3
Pages C-3
Greyed-out Choices C-4
Option Buttons C-4
Dynamic Option Button Labels C-4
Menus C-5
Text Boxes C-5
Help Tips C-5
Radio Buttons C-5
Check Boxes C-6
Alert Button C-6
Progress Bars C-6
Windows When the STRATA RX Configurator icon, as shown Note Windows, other than the Configurator software
below, is selected on your PC desktop and the software is windows, may vary from those presented in this
initialized, the STRATA RX Configuration Utility window is manual due to differences between PC Operating
displayed. See Figure C-1. . Systems or the “Views” option selected for the
window. See “PC Requirements” on page C-34.
Other windows displayed during use of the Configurator software

include those displayed when loading or saving configuration
files. See Figure C-2 on page C-3.
If you are connected to the internet, selecting the

MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS logo box in the
upper, right-hand corner of the window will take you directly to
the MRC home page.

Figure C-2: Typical Window Figure C-3: Main Page with Greyed-Out Tabs - Typical
Tabs A maximum of seven tabs will appear across the bottom of The Chan Plan tab will appear when the STRATA RX System is
the Main page when the Configurator software is connected to connected to the Configurator software. See Figure C-4 on
the STRATA RX System. These tabs correspond to the seven page C-4. Please note that the Chan Plan tab will appear only if
pages of options available. See Figure C-3. your STRATA RX System contains an RXU.
Note that only five tabs appear in the example shown in Figure The Monitor tab will also appear only when the STRATA RX
C-3. This is because the Configurator software is not connected System is connected to the Configurator software and the
to a STRATA RX System at this time. To select a page, just MONITOR OFF option button is selected. When the MONITOR
select a tab when the tab is active (not greyed-out). OFF option button is selected, the button label will change to
Greyed-Out Tabs If a page is unavailable, the tab label will read MONITOR ON and the Monitor tab appears.
appear in grey or may not be displayed. As an example, in Pages Each page contains settings or options that apply only to
Figure C-3, the Radio, COFDM, MPEG, and FMR tabs are grey that particular function. For example, the FMR page shown in
because the Configurator software is not connected to a Figure C-4 on page C-4 contains all the settings that apply to the
STRATA RX System. FMR Demodulator option. Each of the individual pages are
described later in this Appendix.

Figure C-4: FMR Page - Typical Figure C-5: Main Page General Operation Option Buttons
Greyed-out Choices If some choices or settings do not apply,

they will appear in grey. For example, on the FMR page shown Dynamic Option Button Labels When you click on certain
in Figure C-4, Preset 1 and Preset 2, Preset 4 thru Preset 8, labelled option buttons to execute an action, the label on the
and the Video Deviation and LP Filter options for these Presets button changes to keep you apprised of the status. For example,
are grey. This is because the Radio page Operation Mode in Figure C-6, when the Radio page General Operations -
options for these Presets are not enabled for the FM CV Out CONN button is selected, the label changes to read DCON. The
operation mode. option button will be surrounded by a flashing light blue frame
Option Buttons Labelled option buttons are provided to make until connection is complete.
selections applicable to that page. In some cases, this will be to
select the Preset for the settings you wish to change. On all Figure C-6: Dynamic Option Button Labels- - Typical
pages except the Monitor page, option buttons are provided to
READ settings from, or PROG (program) settings to, the
STRATA RX System.
On the Main page, option buttons are also provided to control
communication between your PC and the STRATA RX System
In another example, when the Radio page General Operations-
and to execute loading and saving settings to and from files on
MONITOR OFF option button is selected, the option button label
your PC. See Figure C-5. Each of the individual option buttons
will change to read MONITOR ON, the option button will change
are described later in this Appendix.

to green, and after a short delay, will display the current Preset Text Boxes Text boxes are contained on the Radio, MPEG, and
selected by the Preset pull-down menu. See Figure C-7. Chan Plan pages. Text boxes allow you to change text or values
on individual pages. In the example shown in Figure C-9, text
Figure C-7: MONITOR OFF Option Button - Typical boxes are provided for both the Preset Name and the Squelch
value to allow you to change the individual Preset names and
squelch values, as required. To change a text box name or
value, select the text box and enter the name or value required.
Figure C-9: Text Box - Typical
Help Tips Help tips are displayed to indicate value ranges for
Current certain options. In the example shown in Figure C-10, when the
Monitored Preset Pull- Radio page Squelch option is selected and the cursor is moved
Preset Down Menu into the Squelch text box, the value range will be displayed.
Figure C-10: Help Tips - Typical

Menus Pull-down menus are contained on all pages except the
Monitor page. Pull-down menus are provided to select certain
options. In the example shown in Figure C-8, the Radio page
Operation Mode pull-down menu allows selection of MPEG CV
Out, ASI Output, SDI Output, Ext. IF, and FM CV Out
operation modes for each Preset.
Figure C-8: Drop-Down Menu - Typical Radio Buttons Radio buttons are contained on the Radio and
FMR pages. One button is always selected by default. When
another radio button is selected, the default button becomes
inactive and the selected radio button becomes active. See
Figure C-11 on page C-6.

Figure C-11: Radio Buttons - Typical Progress Bars The Configurator software provides progress
bars located near the top of all pages except the Monitor page.
The progress bars are observed only when reading settings from
the radio or programming settings to the radio on the individual
pages. See Figure C-14.
Figure C-14: Progress Bar - Typical
Check Boxes Check boxes are provided on the MPEG and

FMR pages. Selection of a check box will enable an option
(checked) or disable an option (not checked). See Figure C-12.
Figure C-12: Check Boxes - Typical
Alert Button For each error message detected during

connection of the STRATA RX System to the Configurator
software or during monitoring operations, the alert button shall
display No Msgs, Next Msg, Confirm, or Alert. See Figure C-
13. The alert button must be selected to acknowledge and to
clear each Confirm or Alert alert. The progress bars provide an estimate of the time remaining to
Next Msg alerts will automatically be cleared when the complete a particular process. Progress bars occasionally may
connection process is complete. not be observed, as loading or saving settings occurs almost
instantaneously.
Figure C-13: Alert Buttons
C.3.2 Graphical User Interface Options
The Configurator software Graphical User Interface (GUI)
provides the ability to use a keyboard and mouse or keyboard

shortcut keys, i.e., function keys, arrow keys, and the Tab key to • Create a new channel plan
select certain options and settings.
• Load and modify a channel plan from a file on your PC
C.3.3 Load and Program Options • Load and modify a channel plan from a STRATA RX
System
The Configurator software gives you the ability to create, modify,
save, and load STRATA RX System configurations or channel • Save channel plans to a file on your PC
plans. • Program a channel plan into a STRATA RX System.
Here are the topics covered: Please note that channel plans may be created or modified
Loading or programming the entire radio is the best choice when
Topic Page
you have many changes to make. When the changes are more
Configurations C-7 limited, loading or programming a single page or a single preset
Channel Plans C-7 will save time.
Read or Program Entire Radio C-7 Read or Program Entire Radio Reading (loading) or
Read or Program a Single Page C-8 programming settings for the entire radio is accomplished on the
Program Individual Presets C-8 Main page of the Configurator software using the Radio
Operations - READ option button or the PROG option button.
Configurations The Configurator software gives you the See Figure C-15 on page C-8.
following options to prepare, modify, save, or load configuration When you are reading from the entire radio, all of the current
settings into your STRATA RX System: configuration and channel plan settings in the STRATA RX
• Create a new configuration System are read (loaded) into the Configurator software and
• Load and modify a configuration from a file on your PC appear on-screen.
When you are programming the entire radio, all of the current
• Load and modify a configuration from a STRATA RX
System configuration settings from all of the Configurator software
pages, including the Chan Plan page, are programmed into the
• Load and modify individual configuration pages STRATA RX System. Old settings will be replaced.
• Save configurations to a file on your PC
• Program a configuration into a STRATA RX System.
Channel Plans The Configurator software gives you the
following options to prepare, modify, save, or load channel plans
into your STRATA RX System:

Figure C-15: Main Page - Load Settings from Entire Radio set up using the other Configurator software pages, as required.
Then return to the Main page and select the Preset required
using the General Operations Preset pull-down menu. See
Figure C-17.
Figure C-16: FMR Page - Load Settings from a Single Page
Read or Program a Single Page Reading or programming a

single page is performed on the Configurator software page you
want to work with. The Radio, COFDM, MPEG, FMR, and Chan
Plan pages each contain Radio XXX Operations - READ and
PROG option buttons used to read and program changes to
settings applicable only to the selected page. Figure C-17: Main Page - General Operations Preset Pull-
Down Menu
For example, if you are changing settings only on the FMR page,
you would use the Radio FMR Operations - READ and PROG
option buttons on that page. See Figure C-16.
When you program a single page, the Configurator software only
programs the settings on that page to the radio - even if you
changed settings on other pages. Changes to other pages must
be programmed from the individual pages.
Program Individual Presets Programming an individual Preset
is performed on the Main page. Details for the Preset must be

Finally, select the General Operations - PROG option button. Channel Plan Page C-24
See Figure C-18. When you program an individual Preset, the
Monitor Page C-27
Configurator software only programs the settings for the selected
Preset into the radio - even if you changed settings on other
Presets, as well.
C.4.1 Main Page
The Main page is shown in Figure C-19 on page C-10. This is
Figure C-18: General Operations PROG Option Button the page that displays when the Configurator software starts
running, or when you click on the Main tab.
Topic Page
COM Port Pull-Down Menu C-10
When you select the General Operations - PROG button, a Connect to Radio Option Button C-10
flashing light blue frame will surround the PROG button until the
programming process is completed. During the programming Preset Pull-Down Menu C-11
process, a progress bar is displayed near the top of the Main Program to Radio Option Button C-11
page. Load Settings from File Option C-11
Button
C.4 Configurator Pages Save Settings to File Option C-11

Button
This section describes the different pages available in the SYSTEM INFORMATION Option C-12
Configurator software and settings made on each page. Button
Here are the topics covered: Monitor Option Buttons C-12
Radio Operations - READ Option C-13
Topic Page Button
Main Page C-9 Program Entire Radio Option C-13
Radio Page C-16 Button
COFDM Page C-18 Configuration Buttons C-13
MPEG Page C-19
You will use the Main page to:
FMR Page C-23
• Establish a data connection to the STRATA RX System

• Load configuration settings from, and save settings to, a • RXU - FMR Only (Analog Only)
file on your PC
• RXU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
• Load settings from, and program settings to, the STRATA
• RXU and RCU - RXU FMR Only (Analog Only)
RX System
• RXU and RCU - RXU COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
• Load settings to a specific Preset.
• RXU and RCU - RCU FMR, COFDM, and MPEG (Analog/
Figure C-19: Main Page - Typical
Digital)
COM Port Pull-Down Menu The General Operations COM
port pull-down menu is used to select the COM port used by your
PC to connect to your STRATA RX System. See Figure C-20.
Drop-down menu options are [Auto Detect] and COM 1 thru
COM 9.
Figure C-20: COM Port Pull-Down Menu
The Main page contains the General Operations option

buttons, Radio Operations option buttons, and STRATA RXU
and STRATA RCU configuration option buttons and text boxes If you know your PC COM port number, use the pull-down menu
that display the versions of the modules contained in your to select it. Otherwise, select [Auto Detect]. Selecting your
STRATA RX System. actual COM port number may speed up the connection process
between your PC and the STRATA RX System.
Your STRATA RX System will consist of one of the following
configurations: Connect to Radio Option Button When you are connected to
the STRATA RX System via an RS-232 link, select the CONN
• RCU - FMR Only (Analog Only) option button to connect your PC to the STRATA RX System.
• RCU - FMR, COFDM, and MPEG (Analog/Digital) The CONN option button label will change to read DCON.
• RCU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)

During the connection process, a progress bar is displayed near software, the configuration settings may be modified and saved
the top of the Main page. to a file or may be loaded into the STRATA RX System.
Preset Pull-Down Menu When the STRATA RX System is
connected, the Preset pull-down menu will be active. To Figure C-22: Load an Instrument Configuration File
program a specific Preset into your STRATA RX System, the Window - Typical
Preset to be programmed must be selected using the drop-down
menu. See Figure C-21.
Figure C-21: Preset Pull-Down Menu
Program to Radio Option Button The General Operations -

PROG option button programs configuration settings from all
applicable pages into the STRATA RX System for the selected Save Settings to File Option Button The SAVE option button
Preset only. When the PROG option button is selected, a is used to save configuration settings to a file on your PC. When
flashing light blue frame surrounds the option button until the SAVE option button is selected, the Save an Instrument
programming is complete. During the programming process, a Configuration File window will be displayed. See Figure C-23
progress bar is also displayed near the top of the Main page. on page C-12.
Load Settings from File Option Button The LOAD option Enter a file name in the File name: text box and select the Save
button is used to load configuration settings from a file on your option button. The configuration will be saved to a file on your
PC. When the LOAD option button is selected, the Load an PC.
Instrument Configuration File window will be displayed. See
Figure C-22.
Navigate to the file required, select the file, and select the Open
option button. Once the file is loaded into the Configurator

Figure C-23: Save an Instrument Configuration File Figure C-24: About Window
Window - Typical
If you are connected to the internet, selecting the

MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS logo box (See
SYSTEM INFORMATION Option Button Selecting the Main Figure C-25) or the product photo in the About window will take
page SYSTEM INFORMATION option button displays the About you directly to the MRC home page. Selecting the
window. See Figure C-24. MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS logo box on the
The About window allows you to compare the version number Main page will also take you directly to the MRC home page.
displayed on your STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU alphanumeric
display when the unit is initially powered up. Figure C-25: MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS Logo
Box
The version listed in the About window For use with... line is
the minimum version of the STRATA RX System required (i.e.,
the STRATA RX System should be that version or higher). If
your STRATA RX System is at that version or higher, there are
no compatibility issues. If your STRATA RX System version falls
below that minimum, contact MRC to check for any compatibility
Monitor Option Buttons The Monitor tab will not be displayed
issues. Select the OK option button to close the About...
until the MONITOR OFF option button is selected. When the
window.
MONITOR OFF option button is selected, the option button label
will change to read MONITOR ON and the Monitor tab will be

displayed. After a short delay, the name of the Preset selected Configuration Buttons When your STRATA RX System is
to be monitored will also be displayed on the button label. connected to the Configurator software, the STRATA RXU and
When the MONITOR OFF option button is selected, the STRATA STRATA RCU configuration option buttons will automatically be
RX Monitor Utility option button will be displayed on the selected and the applicable tabs and pages will be enabled. In
Windows tool bar. See Figure C-26. addition, the versions of all modules contained in your STRATA
RX System will be displayed in the text boxes as follows:
Figure C-26: STRATA RX Monitor Utility Option Button • RCU - FMR Only (Analog Only) See Figure C-27 on
page C-14
• RCU - FMR, COFDM, and MPEG (Analog/Digital) See
Figure C-28 on page C-14
• RCU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only) See Figure C-
Selecting the MONITOR ON button will change the label to 29 on page C-14
MONITOR OFF and the Monitor tab and the STRATA RX
Monitor Utility option button will no longer be displayed. • RXU - FMR Only (Analog Only) See Figure C-30 on
page C-14
Radio Operations - READ Option Button The Radio
Operations - READ option button is only active when the • RXU - COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only) See Figure C-
STRATA RX System is connected to your PC. When the READ 31 on page C-15
option button is selected, all configuration settings from your • RXU and RCU - RXU FMR Only (Analog Only) See
STRATA RX System are loaded into the Configurator software. Figure C-32 on page C-15
During the read process, a flashing, light blue frame surrounds • RXU and RCU - RXU COFDM and MPEG (Digital Only)
the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the See Figure C-33 on page C-15
top of the Main page.
• RXU and RCU - RCU FMR, COFDM, and MPEG (Analog/
Program Entire Radio Option Button The Radio Operations- Digital) See Figure C-34 on page C-15
PROG option button is active only when the STRATA RX System
is connected to your PC. When the PROG option button is
selected, all configuration settings from the Configurator
software, including the channel plan, are loaded into your
STRATA RX System.
During programming, a flashing, light blue frame surrounds the
the PROG option button and a progress bar will be displayed
near the top of the Main page.

Figure C-27: STRATA RCU - FMR Only Figure C-29: STRATA RCU - COFDM and MPEG Only
Figure C-28: STRATA RCU - FMR, COFDM, and MPEG Figure C-30: STRATA RXU - FMR Only

Figure C-31: STRATA RXU COFDM and MPEG Figure C-33: STRATA RXU and STRATA RCU - RXU COFDM
and MPEG
Figure C-32: STRATA RXU and STRATA RCU - RXU FMR

Only Figure C-34: STRATA RXU and STRATA RCU - RCU FMR,
COFDM, and MPEG

C.4.2 Radio Page You will use the Radio page to define settings for each of the
nine available Presets. For each Preset you can perform the
A typical Radio page is shown in Figure C-35. This page is
following:
displayed when the Radio tab is selected.
Enter Custom Preset Text Enter a custom Preset Name for
each Preset (12 alphanumeric characters maximum), as
required. Select the existing Preset Name for the required
Preset and enter the new name, as required.
Topic Page
Select Operation Mode Select the Operation Mode using the
Enter Custom Preset Text C-16
drop-down menu button for each Preset, as required. See
Select Operation Mode C-16 Figure C-36.
Select Monitor Out Mode C-17
Select Filter Type C-17 Figure C-36: Operation Mode Drop-Down Menu Options
Select Squelch C-17
Radio Preset Operations - READ C-18
Option Button
Radio Preset Operations - PROG C-18
Option Button
Figure C-35: Radio Page - Typical

The Operation Mode selection choices are as follows:
• MPEG CV Out
The output of the STRATA RX System is digital MPEG
Composite Video (CV) plus audio.
• ASI Output
The output of the STRATA RX System is digital ASI data.
• SDI Output
The output of the STRATA RX System is digital SDI data.
• Ext. IF
The output of the STRATA RX System is 70 MHz IF.

• FM CV Out In the analog FM CV Out operation mode, this setting
The output of the STRATA RX System is analog defaults to 70 MHz IF output.
composite video with audio subcarriers.
Select Filter Type Select the filter type required for each
When you select an Operation Mode, the Configurator software individual Preset, as required. Filter Type options are Digital or
automatically enables or disables other tabs, pages, or other Analog. See Figure C-38.
options based on your selection(s).
Select Monitor Out Mode If your RXU or RCU has COFDM/ Figure C-38: Filter Type Radio Buttons - Typical
MPEG installed, the signal output from the MON. (monitor)
connector is selected using the Monitor Out radio buttons for
each individual Preset. See Figure C-37.
Figure C-37: Monitor Out Radio Buttons - Typical
• Use the Digital option for digital operation (MPEG CV

Out, ASI Output, or SDI Output)
• Use the Analog option for analog operation (FM CV Out).
Select Squelch To enter a value for the Squelch level, select
the text box and enter the squelch level required. The values are
from -65 to -95 dB or N for no squelch. A help tip is displayed
when the cursor is moved into an active Squelch text box. See
Monitor Out choices are as follows:
Figure C-39. Note that the Squelch option is active only for the
• IF analog Ext. IF and FM CV Out operation modes.
The 70 MHz IF signal (either analog or digital) before it
enters the demodulator. Figure C-39: Squelch Text Box - Typical
• ASI
The digital ASI output from the COFDM demodulator.
Note that the ASI option is available only in the digital

MPEG CV Out, ASI Output, and SDI Output operating
modes only.

Radio Preset Operations - READ Option Button When the
Radio Preset Operations - READ option button is selected,
only Radio page configuration settings from your STRATA RX Topic Page
System are loaded into the Configurator software. See Select Bandwidth C-18
Figure C-40. No settings from any other page are loaded into Radio COFDM Operations - READ C-19
the STRATA RX System when this option button is selected. Option Button
Radio COFDM Operations - PROG C-19
Figure C-40: Radio Preset Operations Option Buttons Option Button
Figure C-41: COFDM Page - Typical
During the read process, a flashing, light blue frame surrounds

the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the
top of the page.
Radio Preset Operations - PROG Option Button When the
Radio Preset Operations - PROG option button is selected,
only configuration settings from the Configurator software Radio
page, are loaded into your STRATA RX System, even if changes
were made to other pages, as well.
During programming, a flashing light blue frame surrounds the
the PROG button and a progress bar will be displayed near the
The COFDM page is used to define specific Preset pedestal
top of the page.
bandwidth settings only for the MPEG CV Out, ASI Output, and
SDI Output operation modes selected on the Radio page. The
C.4.3 COFDM Page bandwidth setting options are inactive (greyed out) for the Ext. IF
A typical COFDM page is shown in Figure C-41. This page is and FM CV Out operation modes.
displayed when the COFDM tab is selected. Select Bandwidth Select the Bandwidth pull-down menu for
Here are the topics covered: each applicable Preset, as required. The bandwidth defines the
width, in MHz, of the COFDM pedestal. Smaller pedestals may

perform better in crowded channels, while larger pedestals During programming, a flashing light blue frame surrounds the
provide higher data rates. the PROG button and a progress bar will be displayed near the
Bandwidth selection choices for Presets with COFDM IF Out or top of the page.
COFDM-ASI In operation modes are as follows:
C.4.4 MPEG Page
• 6 MHz
A typical MPEG page is shown in Figure C-43. This page is
• 7 MHz displayed when the MPEG tab is selected.
• 8 MHz Here are the topics covered:
• Auto
Topic Page
Radio COFDM Operations - READ Option Button When the
MPEG Audio Output Levels C-20
Radio COFDM Operations - READ option button is selected,
only COFDM page configuration settings from your STRATA RX Select NTSC Pedestal Option C-20
System are loaded into the Configurator software. See Enable Preset BISS Encryption C-20
Figure C-42. No settings from any other page are loaded into Select Service Information C-21
the STRATA RX System when this option button is selected. Select Preset Color Bars Options C-22
Select Audio Output C-22
Figure C-42: Radio COFDM Operations Option Buttons
Radio MPEG Operations - READ C-23
Option Button
Radio MPEG Operations - PROG C-23
Option Button

the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the
top of the page.
Radio COFDM Operations - PROG Option Button When the
Radio COFDM Operations - PROG option button is selected,
only configuration settings from the Configurator software
COFDM page, are loaded into your STRATA RX System, even if
changes were made to other pages, as well.

Figure C-43: MPEG Page - Typical Select NTSC Pedestal Option For each Preset, you can select
if the decoder adds an NTSC pedestal to the incoming signal.
The NTSC pedestal option is selected using the NTSC Pedestal
check box. Choices are as follows:
• Selected (checked)
The STRATA RX System adds an NTSC pedestal to the

signal.
• Not selected (not checked)
The incoming signal passes through with no modification.

The default setting is not selected (not checked). This is the
recommended option as it allows compatibility with the widest
range of signals.
The MPEG page is used to define certain settings for Presets Enable Preset BISS Encryption Basic Interoperable
with a Radio page Operation Mode of MPEG CV Out or SDI Scrambling System (BISS) encryption is a factory-enabled
Output. Note that only Presets with these operating modes will option that must be ordered when you order your STRATA RX
be active. Presets with other operating modes will be inactive System. Encryption and decryption apply to both the video/
(greyed out). audio data and the additional Wayside data.
The Preset being configured must be selected by clicking the If BISS is factory-enabled, you have access to the following
applicable Preset button. MPEG page settings available are as settings using the Encryption - Type: pull-down option menu.
follows: See Figure C-45.
MPEG Audio Output Levels Audio output attenuation levels Figure C-45: Encryption - Type Pull-Down Menu
are set using the Audio A and Audio B text boxes. The ranges
are 0 to 60 (0.0 to 6.0 dB). See Figure C-44.
Figure C-44: MPEG Audio Output Levels Text Boxes -

Typical
Selection choices are as follows:

• OFF Figure C-47: BISS E Key and E ID
BISS is disabled.
• BISS-1
Encryption using a fixed key.
• BISS-E
Encryption using an encrypted key. BISS-E is used in a
secure key distribution scheme. If you don’t have the BISS Encryption can be configured for each Preset. When
ability to generate secure encrypted keys using the BISS- receiving encrypted video, if you switch to a Preset that has no
E ID and a secret fixed key, then you should consider BISS key information entered, the STRATA RX System will
using BISS-1 instead. continue to decrypt the video.
To enable BISS, enter the key you have selected to enable fixed- To prevent this, be sure to enter key information for each BISS-
key encryption. The key must be used by both the transmitting enabled Preset. If a particular Preset should not have access to
site and the receiving site. The key should be chosen at random the encrypted information, enter an invalid key for that Preset.
and should be retained and kept secret.
Select Service Information When selected (checked), the
• 1 Key: Service Information option is active and the Service - Prof
Enter the key you received from MRC to enable fixed-key (preference) and Service - No text boxes are active. When not
encryption in the 1 Key text box. See Figure C-46. The selected (not checked), the Service Information option is
key must be used by both the transmitting site and the inactive and the PCR PID, DAT PID, Video PID, and Audio -
receiving site. PID A/B text boxes are active. See Figure C-48.
Figure C-46: BISS-1 1 Key Figure C-48: Service Information and PIDs
• E Key: and E ID:

Enter the key and ID characters you received from MRC
to enable encrypted-key decryption. The same key and
ID must be used at both the transmitting site and the
receiving sites. See Figure C-47.

Parts of the MPEG stream are marked with Program In a normal setting, however, you would be expected to enter a
Identifications (PIDs) so that they can be turned back into video PCR PID, a Video PID, and Audio PID A and/or B. If you also
or audio at the receiver. All parts of the data stream (video, wish to receive Wayside data, you must also enter the DAT PID.
audio, PCR, and the other parts of the stream that are not
Select Preset Color Bars Options Select Preset Color Bars
relevant) are marked with unique PIDs in the range of 0 thru
options using the drop-down menu button for each Preset, as
8190.
required. See Figure C-49.
The decoder utilizes a couple of different mechanisms to
determine which PIDs contain data. The primary mechanism is Figure C-49: Color Bars Options
the Service Information option. This is transmitted in a special
stream that the decoder inherently knows how to decode.
The Service Information option maps a service name to a
group of PIDs (PCR, video, audio, and optionally, data). In this
instance, you merely need to designate the service that you wish
to use using the Service - Pref (preferred service name) or the Note The Color Bars options are active (not greyed out)
Service - No (number). The service name takes priority over the only if the Preset Operation Mode selected on the
service number if the service name matches. Radio page is MPEG CV Out or SDI Output.
The other method that the decoder obtains this information is if
you manually enter all of the PIDs. In this case, the decoder Choices are as follows:
ignores the information in the service information tables and • ON - Color bars turned on
uses the PIDs provided to attempt to decode video, audio, and
data. In this instance, you must know much more about the • OFF - Color bars turned off.
incoming stream than simply the service you want to view. Select Audio Output Select the Audio - Output pull-down
Nevertheless, this is useful in some broadcast situations, so the menu for each Preset, as required. The Output selection
capability is provided. choices are Analog and AES/EBU. See Figure C-50.
To manually enter PIDs, you must enter a PCR PID, at the very
least. This designates the PID that the decoder should use to Figure C-50: Audio Output Options
recover its program clock so that the video and audio displays at
the right time and speed and is synchronized.
Additionally, you must designate PIDs for each stream that they
wish to receive. For example, if you don’t care about audio, you
may simply enter a PCR PID and a Video PID in order to view
good video. Audio - Output option choices are as follows:

• AES EBU C.4.5 FMR Page
The XLR output is assumed to comply with AES EBU
A typical FMR page is shown in Figure C-52. This page is
digital standard
displayed when the FMR tab is selected.
• Analog
The XLR output is treated as analog and is encoded. Figure C-52: FMR Page
The Audio - A Stream and B Stream pull-down menus
currently provide only the MPEG options.
Radio MPEG Operations - READ Option Button When the
Radio MPEG Operations - READ option button is selected, only
MPEG page configuration settings from your STRATA RX
System are loaded into the Configurator software. See
Figure C-51. No settings from any other page are loaded into
the STRATA RX System when this option button is selected.
Figure C-51: Radio MPEG Operations Option Buttons

the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the Topic Page
top of the page.
Select Video Deviation Option C-24
Radio MPEG Operations - PROG Option Button When the Select Low Pass Filter Option C-24
Radio MPEG Operations - PROG option button is selected,
Select Audio Sub-Carrier Configuration C-24
only configuration settings from the Configurator software MPEG Options
page, are loaded into your STRATA RX System, even if changes
were made to other pages, as well. Radio FMR Operations - READ Option C-24
Button
During programming, a flashing light blue frame surrounds the Radio FMR Operations - PROG Option C-24
the PROG button and a progress bar will be displayed near the Button
top of the page.

The FMR page is used to define certain settings for Presets with • Deemphasis
the Radio page Operation Mode set to FM CV Out. When selected (checked), that audio channel deemphasis
Only Presets with the FM CV Out operating mode will be active. is turned on. When not selected (unchecked), that audio
Presets with other operating modes will be inactive (greyed out). channel deemphasis is turned off.
Note that the Preset being configured must be selected by Radio FMR Operations - READ Option Button When the
clicking the applicable Preset button. Radio FMR Operations - READ option button is selected, only
FMR page configuration settings from your STRATA RX System
FMT page settings available are as follows: are loaded into the Configurator software. See Figure C-53. No
Select Video Deviation Option Video deviation for individual settings from any other page are loaded into the STRATA RX
Presets may be set to either 3 MHz or 4 MHz by selecting the System when this option button is selected.
option button next to the Video Deviation frequency required.
Figure C-53: Radio FMR Operations Option Buttons
Select Low Pass Filter Option Low pass (LP) filter settings
may be set to either ON or OFF using the applicable LP Filter
option buttons.
Select Audio Sub-Carrier Configuration Options For each
audio sub-carrier, you can perform the following:
• Enable/Disable Channel
When selected (checked), turns that audio channel on. During the read process, a flashing, light blue frame surrounds
When not selected (unchecked), turns that audio channel the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the
off. top of the page.
• Frequency Radio FMR Operations - PROG Option Button When the

Sets the sub-carrier frequency using the Frequency pull- Radio FMR Operations - PROG option button is selected, only
down menu. Choices are: configuration settings from the Configurator software FMR page,
are loaded into your STRATA RX System, even if changes were
4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz made to other pages, as well.
6800 kHz 7020 kHz 7500 kHz 8065 kHz
8300 kHz 8590 kHz During programming, a flashing light blue frame surrounds the
the PROG button and a progress bar will be displayed near the
• Filtered top of the page.
When selected (checked), that audio channel filter is
turned on. When not selected (not checked), that audio
C.4.6 Channel Plan Page
channel is turned off.
A typical channel plan page is shown in Figure C-54 on page C-
25. This page is displayed when the Chan Plan tab is selected.

Figure C-54: Channel Plan Page - Typical store the channel plan settings to a file on your PC or to load the
settings into your STRATA RX System.
The Chan Plan page provides options for frequencies and
offsets for each of the available channels. Frequencies can be
set in the following ways for the channels and offsets:
• Use the standard default frequency plan
• Create custom frequencies and offsets.
Note that the number of channels available on the Chan Plan
page depend upon the band (2 GHz or 7 GHz) currently selected
for your STRATA RX System. A total of 10 channels are
available in the 2 GHz band and a total of 14 channels are
available in the 7 GHz band.
For each channel, you can enter the Offset- frequency and the
Center and Offset+ frequencies.
Entering Frequencies Frequencies are changed by
Topic Page highlighting the text box for the required channel frequency and
Entering Frequencies C-25 then entering the new frequency required.
Manage the Channel Plan C-26 Observe the following requirements when entering frequencies
Radio Operations - READ Option C-27 and offset frequencies:
Button • The decimal separator must be a decimal point ( . ), not a
Radio Operations - PROG Option C-27 comma ( , ). If your computer is configured to use a
Button comma as the decimal separator, see “Decimal Separator
Compatibility” on page C-42.
Please note that the Chan Plan tab will appear only if your
STRATA RX System contains an RXU. • Frequencies must be within the specified frequency limits.
An entry outside of the defined limits will default to the
The Chan Plan page is used to define the frequencies to be
lower limit or the upper limit (1990.000 or 2500.000 in the
used by each available channel and offset for each band your
2 GHz band and 6400.000 or 7200.000 in the 7 GHz
STRATA RX System is equipped to use.
band).
The bands available will be configured at the factory when your
• Frequencies must be entered in MHz, with the smallest
radio is built. After that, the Configurator software will be used to
increment being 0.1 MHz.

• Frequencies must follow the formats shown in Figure C- Figure C-56: 7 GHz Frequency Formats - Typical
55 and Figure C-56, with no spaces or alphabetic
characters.
• All active fields must be filled - Leave no blank fields.
• Data may be entered only in active fields. No data may
be entered in fields that are greyed out.
Figure C-55: 2 GHz Frequency Formats - Typical
Manage the Channel Plan In addition, you can take the

following actions:
• Load Plan from File (See Figure C-57 on page C-27)
- Selecting the File Access - LOAD option button loads
in a channel plan you have previously saved to a file
on your PC.
• Save Plan to File
- Selecting the File Access - SAVE option button saves
the currently displayed channel plan to a file on your
PC. The default directory is “My Documents”.

Figure C-57: File Access Option Buttons Figure C-59: Radio Operations Option Buttons

• Clear Channel Plan (See Figure C-58) the READ option button and a progress bar is displayed near the
- Selecting the Channel Plan - CLR option button top of the page.
erases entries for all channels and offsets. This option Radio Operations - PROG Option Button When the PROG
button is used when you want to clear all channels option button is selected, only configuration settings from the
(and offsets) to enter a custom channel plan. Configurator software Chan Plan page, are loaded into your
• Default Channel Plan STRATA RX System, even if changes were made to other
pages, as well.
- Selecting the Channel Plan - DFLT option button fills
the channels (and offsets) with the US frequencies During programming, a flashing light blue frame surrounds the
approved by the FCC for that band. the PROG button and a progress bar will be displayed near the
top of the page.
Figure C-58: Channel Plan Option Buttons
C.4.7 Monitor Page
The Monitor page is present only when the STRATA RX System
is connected to the Configurator software and the Main page
General Operations - MONITOR OFF option button has been
selected.
Radio Operations - READ Option Button When the READ
option button is selected, only Chan Plan page configuration Topic Page
settings from your STRATA RX System are loaded into the Monitor Status Tab C-30
Configurator software. See Figure C-59. No settings from any
Monitor Radio Tab C-31
other page are loaded into the STRATA RX System when this
option button is selected. Monitor COFDM Tab C-32
Monitor MPEG Tab C-33
Monitor Errors Tab C-33

When the MONITOR OFF option button is selected, the option Figure C-61: Preset Monitor Selection Pull-Down Menu
button label changes to read MONITOR ON, and, after a short
delay, the option button label updates and displays the current
Preset being monitored. See Figure C-60.
Figure C-60: MONITOR OFF Option Button
The Monitor page is shown in Figure C-62. This is a typical

page displayed when the Monitor tab has been selected and the
Radio page Operation Mode is set to MPEG CV Out, ASI
Output, or SDI Output.
Figure C-62: Monitor Page - Typical
To select the Preset to be monitored, use the Preset pull-down

menu located in the bottom right-hand corner of the Configurator
software window and select the Submit option button. See
Figure C-61.
The Monitor page displayed when the Operation Mode is set to

FM CV Out is shown in Figure C-63 on page C-29.

Figure C-63: FMR Monitor Page - Typical and the MONITOR OFF option button is selected, the option
button label changes to MONITOR ON and then updates to
display the current Preset being monitored.
Note that the Main page CONN and Radio Operations READ
option buttons must be selected and STRATA RX System
configuration data for all Presets must be read into the
Configurator software for Preset settings to be displayed on the
Monitor pages.
When the MONITOR OFF option button is selected and the
option button label changes to MONITOR ON, the STRATA RX
Monitor Utility option button will also appear on the windows
task bar. See Figure C-66.
Figure C-66: STRATA RX Monitor Utility Option Button

When errors or alerts are detected, a flashing, red frame will
surround the current page being displayed, and the message
alert option button will turn red. Additionally, the Configuration
Utility icon located in the lower, left-hand corner of the
Configurator software window, as shown in Figure C-64, will
change to the ! alert icon, as shown in Figure C-65.
The STRATA RX Monitor Utility option button may be selected
Figure C-64: STRATA RX Configuration Utility Icon to view Preset Radio, COFDM, MPEG, and FMR Information,
plus errors data, as applicable, on a single page in lieu of
selecting individual Monitor page tabs for review. See Figure C-
67 on page C-30. This option may be especially useful during
troubleshooting operations.
Figure C-65: Alert Icon Only one Preset can be monitored on either of the Monitor
pages at a time. The default Preset displayed is the STRATA RX
System active Preset detected during connection to the
Configurator software.
The Monitor page will contain various tabs depending upon the When a different Preset must be selected for monitoring,
options contained in the current active Preset. When the selection of the new Preset is accomplished by using either the
STRATA RX System is connected to the Configurator software Monitor page or the STRATA RX Monitor Utility window Preset

pull-down menu and then selecting the associated Submit the Monitor page Preset name shown on the Preset pull-down
option button. menu after a short delay.
Monitor Status Tab The Monitor page Status tab for an
Figure C-67: STRATA RX Monitor Utility Window
Operation Mode of FMR CV Out is shown in Figure C-68. The
Status page displays RADIO and STATUS data applicable to the
current active Preset.
Figure C-68: FMR CV Mode Status Tab - Typical
Selection of a new Preset will change the current STRATA RX

System active Preset to the new Preset selected. Changes to In this example, the active Preset Operation Mode was set to
the active Preset can be verified by viewing the STRATA RXU or FM CV Out on the Radio page and FMR settings for the Preset
STRATA RCU front panel alphanumeric display. The front panel were set on the FMR page. The icon adjacent to the Audio 1:
alphanumeric display will always display the active preset settings is green, indicating audio is currently present on Audio
selected using the Configurator software. Sub-Carrier Channel 1.
Please note that the active Preset can also be changed using the The icons adjacent to the Audio 2: thru Audio 4: settings are
STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU alphanumeric display and red, indicating either a fault exists on these channels or no audio
control switch. Changes to the Preset using the STRATA RXU or is being received on these channels. When audio becomes
STRATA RCU alphanumeric display and control switch will present on these channels, the icons will change to green,
appear on the Main page MONITOR ON option button and on indicating no fault is present. If an Audio Sub-carrier was not

selected on the FMR page, the applicable icon(s) will be Status tab GRAPH data provides both graphic and numeric
replaced by a large X in the icon box. values for link quality (Quality), signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), Pre-
The Monitor page for an Operation Mode of MPEG CV Out, Viterbi, Post Viterbi, and received carrier level (RCL).
ASI Output, or SDI Output is shown in Figure C-69. When the Status tab is selected, note that the Reset Status
option button appears at the top, right-hand side of the Monitor
Figure C-69: MPEG CV Out Status Tab - Typical page. This option button is only present when the Status tab is
selected.
If an error is present, the marker adjacent to the Status tab title
will be red or yellow, alerting you to a fault. Select the Reset
Status option button to acknowledge the fault(s) and observe the
marker adjacent to the tab title changes to green.
A yellow marker indicates system errors are present that do not
cause the system to lose service. A red marker indicates system
errors are present that do cause the system to lose service.
If other Monitor page tab titles contained red or yellow markers,
selecting the Reset Status option button will reset those markers
to green, as well.
Monitor Radio Tab A typical Monitor page Radio tab is shown
in Figure C-70 on page C-32. This is the page that is displayed
In this example, the Status page indicates the RADIO Mode: for when the Monitor page Radio tab is selected.
the active Preset is set for Operation Mode MPEG CV Out and
the link quality (LQ) Quality: is 9.
The COFDM data indicates the current COFDM pedestal
bandwidth selected for the active Preset (6 MHz), the current
modulation (QPSK), and indicates the current signal-to-noise
ratio (SNR) value.
The MPEG data indicates the current service name being
received, indicates the current MPEG audio output is either
Analog or Digital, and also indicates if the NTSC Pedestal
option was selected on the MPEG page.

Figure C-70: Radio Tab - Typical • Channel - Indicates the current channel and offset
selected by the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU front
panel CHAN and OFFSET switches
• Squelch - Indicates the current Radio page Squelch
setting
• Monitor - Indicates current Radio page Monitor Out
setting (IF or ASI output)
• Frequency - Indicates Radio page frequency assigned to
selected Preset.
Monitor COFDM Tab The Monitor page COFDM tab is shown
in Figure C-71. This is the page that is displayed when the
COFDM tab is selected.
Figure C-71: COFDM Tab - Typical

The Monitor page Radio tab displays Basic Preset
Information for the Preset being monitored. Basic Preset
Information includes the following:
• Preset - Indicates the Preset currently being monitored
• Band - Indicates the current frequency band selected (2
GHz or 7 GHz)
• Mode - indicates the current Radio page Operating
Mode
• Filter - Indicates the Radio page Filter Type setting
(Digital or Analog)
• Quality - Indicates the current link quality. (This option is
not displayed for Radio page Operation Mode FM CV
Out. Link quality is displayed for Operation Mode MPEG
The Monitor page COFDM tab allows you to monitor the
CV Out, ASI Output, and SDI Output only.)
following COFDM Information:
• Signal Level - Indicates the current signal level
• Modulation - QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM

• COFDM Lock - Locked or Unlocked • Video Status - OK or Not OK
• Viterbi BER - Lists Pre- and Post-Viterbi Bit Error Ratios • Audio Type - Analog or AES/EBU
• Bandwidth - 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, or Auto • Service Name - Lists Service Name of transmitter
• Guard Interval - 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32 • Color Bars - ON or OFF
• S/N Ratio - Lists current Signal-to-Noise Ratio • NTSC Pedestal - ON or OFF
• Fwd Error Corr - Forward Error Correction of 1/2, 2/3, 3/ • Packet Errors - Lists number of packet errors
4, 5/6, or 7/8
• System Info - Maps a Service name to a group of PIDs
• Packet Errors - Lists number of packet errors. (audio, video, PCR, and optionally, data)
Monitor MPEG Tab The Monitor page MPEG tab is shown in Monitor Errors Tab The Monitor page Errors tab is shown in
Figure C-72. This is the page that is displayed when the MPEG Figure C-73. This is the page that is displayed when the
tab is selected. Monitor page Errors tab is selected.
Figure C-72: MPEG Tab - Typical Figure C-73: Errors Tab - Typical
The Monitor page MPEG tab allows you to monitor the following The Errors page lists all Active Errors in the STRATA RX
MPEG Information: System. These errors can also be monitored on the STRATA

RXU or STRATA RCU alphanumeric display. If no errors are COM 9. If you do not know the COM port number of your PC,
present, the Errors tab and the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU use the [Auto Detect] option on the Main page of the
alphanumeric display will both display No Errors. Configurator software when connecting to a STRATA RX System
for the first time.
The Errors page will list errors such as missing inputs, i.e.,
E207: FMR Audio 4 No Sub Carrier. The same error would be Processor Speed 200 MHz minimum
displayed on the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU alphanumeric
Memory 128K RAM minimum
display as E207FM NoSub4, since the number of characters is
limited on the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU alphanumeric
display. C.7 Installing the Configurator
The Errors page will also list possible hardware errors. Select Before using the Configurator software, it must be installed on
the Reset Errors option button in the top right-hand corner of the your PC. To install the software, perform the following steps.
Monitor page to reset errors. If the errors are cleared and do
not return after a short delay, you can return to normal operation.
If the errors do return after a short delay, perform fault isolation Note If any version of the STRATA RX Configuration
per the “Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1. Utility software is already installed, you must
remove it before attempting to install a new
version.
C.5 Front Panel vs. Configurator
Use the “Add/Remove Programs” feature in the
The design of the STRATA RX System and Configurator
Windows Control Panel to do this.
software makes commonly available settings accessible from the
STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU front panel and more advanced
settings accessible through the Configurator software. 1. Locate the CD that was provided with your STRATA
RX System.
A summary of which settings can be controlled by each method 2. Insert the CD into your computer CD drive.
is provided in “Front Panel vs. Configurator Settings” on page 3-
30. 3. Using the My Computer icon on your PC (or any other
method), navigate to that CD drive and display the CD
directory on your screen. See Figure C-74.
C.6 PC Requirements
The Configurator software is designed to run on Windows -
based PCs that meet the following requirements:
Operating System Windows 2000 or Windows XP
COM Ports At least one serial port configured as COM 1 thru

Figure C-74: CD Directory - Typical 5. Select the OK option button and observe the Begin
the installation... window is displayed. See Figure C-
76.
Note The installation program will prompt you for the

location where the STRATA RX Configuration
Utility files are to be installed. It is recommended
that you accept the default location of:
C:\Program Files\Strata RX Configurator\
Figure C-76: Begin The Installation... Window
4. Double-click on the setup.exe file and observe the

STRATA RX Configuration Utility (Customer
Edition) Setup Wizard is displayed. See Figure C-75.
Figure C-75: STRATA RX Configuration Utility Setup Wizard Installation

Option
Button
6. Select the installation option button and observe the

Program Group window is displayed. See Figure C-77
on page C-36.

Figure C-77: Program Group Window - Typical
C.8 STRATA RX Configuration Utility

Troubleshooting
This section provides information so you can troubleshoot and
correct problems that may arise when using the Configurator
software.
C.8.1 Configurator Error Messages

The Configurator software has a set of self-diagnostics that will
7. Select the Program Group: required, select the alert you when an operation cannot be completed.
Continue option button, and observe the setup
completion window is displayed. See Figure C-78. When there is a problem, a small pop-up window will appear on
your PC display describing the problem. See Figure C-79 for an
Figure C-78: Setup Completion Window example. You can close the error message window by clicking
the OK option button.
Figure C-79: Connection Failure Error Message Window
8. Select the OK option button and observe the STRATA

RX Configuration Utility (Customer Edition) Setup
Wizard is no longer displayed. See Table C-1 for a listing of the most common Configurator
9. Remove the CD from your CD drive. software error messages and what to do if they occur.
10. You can now prepare a shortcut to place the STRATA For error codes that may appear on the STRATA RXU or
RX Configuration Utility icon on your desktop.

STRATA RCU front panel alphanumeric display, see the Table C-1: Configurator Error Messages (Continued)
“Troubleshooting” Chapter on page 4-1.
Table C-1: Configurator Error Messages Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action
Unable to Connect... Configurator was Turn off STRATA RX
Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action message displayed improperly shut System power, close
in Configurator Main down Configurator, and press
Failed to connect... STRATA RX Turn STRATA RX
page ADVISORY Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to
System power is System power ON.
message area display the Windows
off.
Task Manager.
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be sure If MRCRadio.exe and/
disconnected. connectors on both or StrataRX
ends are fully seated. CnfgCust301...is listed
RS-232 cable is Replace cable. on the Process tab,
defective. select it and select End
COM Port On Main page, select Process option button.
incorrectly correct COM Port or Turn on STRATA RX
configured. select [Auto Detect]. System power, start
Configurator, and
Installed STRATA Contact MRC Technical connect to the STRATA
RX System Support. RX System.
hardware is If still unable to connect,
defective. turn off STRATA RX
System power, close
Configurator, and re-
boot PC.
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be sure
disconnected. connectors on both
ends are fully seated.
RS-232 cable is Replace cable.
defective.

Table C-1: Configurator Error Messages (Continued) Table C-1: Configurator Error Messages (Continued)
Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action
Unable to Connect... Installed STRATA Contact MRC Technical Unable to Retrieve Problem with RS- Try again.
message displayed RX System Support. [Setting] 232 If error still appears,
in Configurator Main hardware is communication. turn off STRATA RX
page ADVISORY defective. OR System power, close
message area the Configurator, then
Unable to Load turn on STRATA RX
Cannot Change Configurator Turn off STRATA RX [Setting] System power and start
Operation Mode... cannot find System power, close Configurator.
installed Configurator, then turn RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be sure
hardware. on STRATA RX System disconnected. connectors on both
power and start ends are fully seated.
Configurator. RS-232 cable is Replace cable.
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Verify defective.
disconnected. connectors on both Installed STRATA Contact MRC Technical
ends are fully seated. RX System Support.
RS-232 cable is Replace cable. hardware is
defective. defective.
Installed STRATA Contact MRC Technical
RX System Support.
hardware is
defective.

Table C-1: Configurator Error Messages (Continued) Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued)
Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action
Configuration File Unable to read Select a different COFDM Page
Corrupt data stored in file configuration file. COFDM tab is Operation Mode On Radio page, set
chosen. selected but setting set incorrectly. Operation Mode for
OR File damaged. Re-create configuration options are greyed Preset(s) to MPEG CV
and save it with a out. Out, ASI Output, or
Unable to Open different filename. SDI Output.
Configuration File
Problem with PC Contact your PC service MPEG Page
or its disk drive. provider. MPEG tab is Operation Mode On Radio page, set
selected but Presets set incorrectly. Operation Mode for
C.8.2 Configurator Operational Problems or setting options Preset(s) to COFDM IF
are greyed out. Out or DVB-Satellite.
See Table C-2 for a listing of the most common operational
problems with the Configurator and what to do if they occur. Preset not Select Preset on MPEG
selected. page by clicking on
Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems Preset button.
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action FMR Page
FMR tab is selected Operation Mode On Radio page, set
STRATA RX
but Presets or setting set incorrectly. Operation Mode for
STRATA RX System Power on Connect power and turn options are greyed Preset(s) to Analog IF
is not detected when STRATA RX unit on. out. Out.
Connect to Radio System is
Preset not Select Preset on FMT
button is selected. disconnected or
selected. page by clicking on
off.
Preset button.
RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be sure
Digital Audio Problems
disconnected. connectors on both
ends are fully seated. No audio produced. Audio A or B Check Audio Output
Stream not set settings on the MPEG
RS-232 cable is Replace cable.
correctly. page.
defective.
RX System Support.
hardware is
defective.

Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued) Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued)
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action
Analog Audio Problems Configurator crashes Incompatible See Decimal Separator
No audio produced Subcarrier Check sub carrier when trying to run. Decimal Compatibility.
even though RCL is frequencies not frequencies on both the Separator
high. set correctly. transmitter and the AND / OR configuration.
STRATA RX System. Program files Use the “Add/Remove
Use the Monitor page Get “Runtime Error” damaged. Programs” function in
Radio tab to view the message. Windows Control Panel
alarm status and to un-install the
identify which STRATA RX
subcarriers not being Configuration Utility,
received. then reinstall it.
PC/Software Problems Problem with PC Contact your PC service
Configurator won’t Previous version Uninstall previous or its disk drive. provider.
install on PC. of STRATA RX version using the “Add/ STRATA RX
Configuration Remove Programs” STRATA RX System Power on Connect power and turn
Utility already function in Windows is not detected when STRATA RX unit on.
installed. Control Panel. Connect to Radio System is
PC does not meet See “PC Requirements” button is selected. disconnected or
System on page C-34. off.
Requirements. RS-232 cable is Connect cable. Be sure
CD damaged. Contact MRC Technical disconnected. connectors on both
Support. ends are fully seated.
Problem with PC Contact your PC service RS-232 cable is Replace cable.
or its disk drive. provider. defective.
RX System Support.
hardware is
defective.

Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued) Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued)
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action
COFDM Page Analog Audio Problems
COFDM tab is Operation Mode On Radio page, set No audio produced Subcarrier Check sub carrier
selected but setting set incorrectly. Operation Mode for even though RCL is frequencies not frequencies on both the
options are greyed Preset(s) to MPEG CV high. set correctly. transmitter and the
out. Out, ASI Output, or STRATA RX System.
SDI Output. Use the Monitor page
MPEG Page Radio tab to view the
alarm status and
MPEG tab is Operation Mode On Radio page, set identify which
selected but Presets set incorrectly. Operation Mode for subcarriers not being
or setting options Preset(s) to COFDM IF received.
are greyed out. Out or DVB-Satellite.
PC/Software Problems
Preset not Select Preset on MPEG
selected. page by clicking on Configurator won’t Previous version Uninstall previous
Preset button. install on PC. of STRATA RX version using the “Add/
Configuration Remove Programs”
FMR Page Utility already function in Windows
FMR tab is selected Operation Mode On Radio page, set installed. Control Panel.
but Presets or setting set incorrectly. Operation Mode for PC does not meet See “PC Requirements”
options are greyed Preset(s) to Analog IF System on page C-34.
out. Out. Requirements.
Preset not Select Preset on FMT CD damaged. Contact MRC Technical
selected. page by clicking on Support.
Preset button.
Problem with PC Contact your PC service
Digital Audio Problems or its disk drive. provider.
No audio produced. Audio A or B Check Audio Output
Stream not set settings on the MPEG
correctly. page.

Table C-2: Configurator Operational Problems (Continued) Figure C-80: Control Panel - Typical
Problem Possible Cause Suggested Action

STRATA RX Incompatible See Decimal Separator
Configuration Utility Decimal Compatibility.
crashes when trying Separator
to run. configuration.
Program files Use the “Add/Remove
AND / OR damaged. Programs” function in
Windows Control Panel
Get “Runtime Error” to un-install the
message. STRATA RX
Configuration Utility,
then reinstall it.
Problem with PC Contact your PC service
or its disk drive. provider.
C.8.3 Decimal Separator Compatibility

The Configurator software is designed to accept only the decimal C.9 Configurator Compatibility
point ( . ) as the decimal separator (i.e., numbers must be
entered as 1234.567). This section will give you compatibility information for the
Configurator software and the STRATA RX System. For
If your PC is configured to use the comma ( , ) as the decimal
Compatibility with various PCs, see “PC Requirements” on
separator, (i.e., 1234,567) the Configurator software will
page C-34.
malfunction.
MRC is continually improving both the STRATA RX System and
To avoid this, we suggest temporarily configuring your PC to use
its Configurator software. To be sure you have the correct
US English while you are working with the Configurator software.
Configurator software for your STRATA RX System, perform the
This is easily done using the Windows Control Panel (See following steps.
Figure C-80), using the “Regional and Language Options”.
1. Apply DC power to your STRATA RX System.
When you are done working with the Configurator software,
simply switch back to the correct language.
Note In the following step, the radio version will only be
displayed for approximately two seconds.

2. Watch the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU 5. Compare the version number in the line For use
alphanumeric display carefully when the PWR switch with... to the version of your STRATA RXU or STRATA
is set to on ( I ) and note the radio version. See RCU found in step 2.
Figure C-81. 6. The version listed in the For use with... line is the
minimum version of the STRATA RXU or STRATA
Figure C-81: Typical Radio Version Screen RCU required (i.e., the STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU
should be that version or higher).
Radio STRATA RXU
Version V 0.X.X If your STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU is at that
version or higher, there are no compatibility issues.
If your STRATA RXU or STRATA RCU version falls

3. Start the Configurator software. The STRATA RX below that minimum, contact MRC to check for any
System does not need to be connected to your PC. compatibility issues.
4. On the Main page, select the SYSTEM
INFORMATION option button to display the About
window. See Figure C-82.
Figure C-82: About Window


D Link Quality D.2 Analog vs. Digital Systems
One of the key differences between analog and digital
transmission is the behavior of the receiving system as the
D.1 Appendix Overview quality of the received signal degrades.
This appendix describes MRC’s Link Quality indicator, and how it

helps you maintain good quality video and audio. Analog Systems In traditional analog transmissions, each link
in the signal path adds a small amount of noise and distortion.
This noise and distortion accumulates as the signal progresses
The topics covered in this chapter are listed below. toward its destination. By the time the signal reaches the final
receiver, the distortion and noise can be quite noticeable.
Topic Page
These sources of distortion and noise also typically change over
Analog vs. Digital Systems D-1 time with changes in atmospheric conditions, movement of the
Understanding Link Quality D-2 transmitter or receiver, etc. Overall signal quality therefore varies
Description D-2 over time as well.
The LQ Scale D-2 In this analog system, when the signal begins to degrade it
LQ and Signal Quality D-3 begins almost immediately to degrade the quality of the
demodulated video and audio. This provides an ‘early warning’
What Actions to Take D-4
that conditions are worsening, allowing the operator to make
Technical Background: LQ D-5 adjustments to restore signal quality before video is lost.
Factors
RCL and SNR D-5
Digital Systems In a digital transmission, the original data is
FEC D-5
reconstituted at each link. This eliminates many of the noise and
GI D-6 distortion problems found with analog transmission.
BW D-6
Thus in a digital system, when the signal quality begins to
BER D-7 degrade it initially has no effect on the video and audio. Powerful
error-correction algorithms repair the signal before it is passed to
the MPEG decoder. The operator continues to observe clean
video and audio, and does not realize the signal quality is
deteriorating.
As the signal quality continues to degrade, the number of errors
finally exceeds what the algorithms are able to correct. Then
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Link Quality D-1

errors begin to pass through to the MPEG decoder. The impact • The modulation in use (QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM).
on the video and audio will usually be minor at first, with some
• The Forward Error Correction (FEC) setting (1/2, 2/3, 3/4,
pixellation of the video typically appearing. The operator may or
5/6, or 7/8).
may not realize how badly the signal has now degraded.
• The Guard Interval (GI) setting (1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4).
Finally, if the signal quality continues to deteriorate, the errors
reaching the MPEG decoder will disrupt the decoder so badly • The CODFDM Bandwidth (BW) in use (6, 7, or 8 MHz).
that it cannot construct an image. The decoder algorithm will
stop working, and the video will then suddenly be lost. Operators D.3.2 The LQ Scale
sometimes refer to this sudden loss of video, with little or no The Link Quality indicator is scaled from 0 to 9, with 9 the highest
apparent warning, as “falling off a cliff”. and 0 the lowest. See Table D-1.
See Figure - on page D-3 for a graphical representation of this
“cliff”.
Table D-1: Link Quality Levels
D.3 Understanding Link Quality LQ

LInk Quality Description
Reading
D.3.1 Description 9 Excellent Link Quality - COFDM link is very robust
MRC has developed the Link Quality (LQ) indicator to give you with ample ability to correct for degradation.
back that ‘early warning’ of an analog system. Link Quality 8 Very Good Link Quality - COFDM link is robust for
monitors several key parameters and settings, and uses a the given environment.
proprietary algorithm to derive one simple indication of digital 7 Standard Link Quality - COFDM link is acceptable
signal quality. for current environment.
The monitored parameters include: 6 Average Link Quality - COFDM link is average -
• Received Carrier Level (RCL). might improve or worsen.
5 Below Average Link Quality - COFDM link is
• Bit Error Ratio (BER) before Forward Error Correction
marginal, not dependable.
(FEC) (also called “Pre-Viterbi BER”).
4 Poor Link Quality - COFDM link is unstable -
• Bit Error Ratio (BER) after Forward Error Correction quality is intermittent and unpredictable.
(FEC) (also called “Post-Viterbi BER”).
1-3 Unsatisfactory Link Quality - COFDM link is not
• Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR). locked.
In addition, the LQ algorithm takes into account these settings: 0 No signal detected.

Blinking LQ If the LQ reading is blinking on the screen, this - Actual Delivered Signal is mostly clean until the MPEG
indicates that the LQ has dropped to 4 or below, sometime within Decoder can no longer construct an image. Then it
the last 2 minutes. The blinking will automatically stop when 2 drops very quickly, falling off “The Cliff”.
minutes have elapsed with an LQ maintained above 4.
Demodulator-Only Systems The measurement of RCL is Link Quality vs. Signal Quality
performed in the RXU. This means if you are using a
Actual Delivered Signal Error Performance (BER)
demodulator-only system (which will have only an RCU), your
Link Quality readings will not be as accurate, since there will be 9 8
The
7
no RCL data. In these conditions, the LQ will typically read 1 - 2 6
“Cliff”
digits above normal. 5
Signal Quality
Link Quality
4
Estimate
D.3.3 LQ and Signal Quality 3
Figure - illustrates how LQ changes as the received digital signal SNR Performance Data
2
degrades. Received Signal Quality is arranged along the top 1
axis, higher on the left and lower to the right.

0
• Starting at the left side of the graph, Received Signal
Quality is high.
Noise
- LQ reading is 9. The link is Excellent.
- Actual Delivered Signal is clean and stable.
• Moving to the right on the graph, the Received Signal D.3.4 LQ Action Levels
Quality degrades. Table D-2 on page D-4 describes the actions we recommend at
- LQ reading begins to drop to 8, then 7, then 6. The link various LQ levels. These are a good initial guide; you should
is still stable, but action should be taken to restore adjust what you do based on your experience.
Received Signal Quality.
- Actual Delivered Signal is still clean.
• Moving further to the right on the graph, the Received
Signal Quality continues to degrade.
- LQ reading starts to drop more rapidly to alert you to
the impending loss of video. As loss of video gets
closer, LQ drops even faster.

- An RCL of -40 to -30 dBm is ideal.
Table D-2: Actions at Link Quality Levels - RCL should be less than -25 dBm. Signals stronger
than this can overload the RX and actually make the
LQ LInk Quality demodulated signal quality worse.
Recommended Action
Reading Description 2. Optimize SNR
9 Excellent Link None required. - If RCL is OK, but SNR is low (13 -15 dB or less), there
Quality may be electrical equipment (or other transmitters) in
8 Very Good Link Most transmissions are made the immediate area creating noise.
Quality with LQ of about 7.
- Try other channels and offsets to avoid other
7 Standard Link transmitters.
Quality - Isolate noise sources by shutting down other
6 Average Link Begin to take action. equipment.
Quality 3. Optimize BER
5 Below Average Rapidly take additional - No signal: Check the COFDM BW setting to be sure it
Link Quality actions. matches the incoming signal.
4 Poor Link Quality Immediately take all available - Change transmit settings to make the link more robust.
1-3 Unsatisfactory actions. You will achieve a lower Data Transfer Rate as you do
Link Quality so. See Table D-3 on page D-5.
0 No signal
Note - Factory default settings are highlighted.
detected.
- The receiver will automatically adjust for the new
D.3.5 What Actions to Take settings.
To improve the Link Quality, we suggest the following general Note - BW must be manually set to match the
sequence of actions. You should develop your own action plan transmitter.
so you’re prepared in case LQ begins to fall.
1. Optimize RCL.
- No signal: Check channel and frequency - be sure
they match the transmitted signal.
- If RCL is -70 dBm or lower, the signal is weak.
Reposition transmit and receive antennas, or increase
transmit power if possible.

However, in digital systems, having a solid RCL with good SNR
Table D-3: Setting Changes to Improve Link Quality is not enough to ensure a good link. If the signal has picked up
errors in the digital data, the link quality can still be poor. Worse,
Link Capability it can be unstable, with the video appearing and disappearing as
the error sources change over time.
Least Most
Robust Robust Optimizing a digital link, then, needs to also consider errors in
the data, as measured by the Bit Error Ratio (BER). The ability to
Modulation 64 QAM 16QAM QPSK correct these errors will depend in part on the settings chosen for
FEC 7/8 5/6 3/4 2/3 1/2 Forward Error Correction (FEC) and Guard Interval (GI).
GI 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4
BW 8 MHz 7 MHz 6 MHz D.4.2 FEC
Note - receiver BW must be manually set to match transmitter. One of the advantages of digital transmission is the ability of the
Highest Lowest receiver to automatically correct errors in the incoming data. This
is possible because the transmitter adds extra “error correction”
Data Transfer Rate bits to the data. These extra bits describe attributes of the
Factory Default Settings are highlighted. original data so it can be reconstructed in the receiver if needed.
The transmitter segments the digital data (the “payload”) into
D.4 Technical Background: LQ small groups of bits called packets. The error correction bits are
likewise grouped into packets, which are added into the data
Factors stream. The number of packets allocated to error correction is
Each of the factors used to derive LQ is important, but none of controlled by the FEC setting in the transmitter.
them alone is sufficient to monitor and optimize the quality of a • An FEC setting of 1/2 means that 1 packet of payload is
digital microwave link. accompanied by 1 packet of error correction. In effect, 1/2
The following sections explain these factors in more detail. of the packets are payload.
This is technical background information to help you understand This is the most robust FEC setting, capable of correcting
LQ and make best use of its capabilities. the most errors. However, it has the lowest data transfer
rate.
D.4.1 RCL and SNR • By contrast, an FEC setting of 7/8 would mean that every
In analog systems, efforts to optimize the link quality are usually 7 packets of payload are accompanied by 1 packet of
directed at improving the received signal strength (RCL), with the error correction. In effect, 7/8 of the packets are payload.
goal of having a strong signal relative to the RF noise present
(SNR).

robust GI setting.
This has a much higher data transfer rate, but has far less
capacity to correct errors than a setting of 1/2 - so it is the
• A GI setting of 1/8 would allow more time for echoes to
least robust FEC setting.
arrive. (On an 8 MHz signal, this delay is 28 uS.)
D.4.3 GI This setting would be useful for city environments, where
Another error-correcting technique used in digital transmission the objects reflecting the signal are relatively close by and
makes use of a Guard Interval (GI). The GI sets how much time the echo delays are relatively short.
the transmitter allows between one symbol and the next. On the
receiving end, GI sets how long the receiver waits after one • A GI setting of 1/4 would allow a longer time for echoes to
symbol before it begins to process the next. arrive. (On an 8 MHz signal, this delay is 56 uS.)
The GI enables the receiver to correct for time-based errors.
These errors typically arise from echoes and reflections as the This setting would be useful for more remote settings,
signal bounces off buildings and terrain along its path. In effect, where the objects reflecting the signal are farther apart
the transmitted signal travels along multiple paths to arrive at the and the echo delays are longer.
receiver. Each of these reflected signals arrives at a slightly
different time depending on the length of its path. This setting has the lowest data transfer rate, but is the
most robust GI setting.
By waiting (for one GI) before attempting to process the next
symbol, the receiver allows time for any echoes of the first
symbol to arrive and thus not contribute errors to the next D.4.4 BW
symbol. When the transmitter applies the COFDM modulation to the
video and audio signals, it creates a signal of a certain
This length of time is controlled by the transmitter’s GI setting.
Bandwidth (BW). This Bandwidth is controlled by the
• A GI setting of 1/32 would allow a short time for echoes to transmitter’s BW setting.
arrive. (On an 8 MHz signal, this delay is 7 uS.)
• A BW setting of 6 MHz would mean the modulated signal
occupies 6 MHz of RF spectrum.
This delay would be used in a situation where the
reflecting objects are very near, such as inside a sports
This setting is the most robust, but has the lowest data
stadium. Any echoes would arrive at the receiver with
transfer rate.
very short delay times.
• A BW setting of 8 MHz would occupy more of the RF
This has the highest data transfer rate, but is the least spectrum.

This setting has the highest data transfer rate, but is the If the Post-Viterbi BER becomes too large, the MPEG decoder
least robust BW setting. will be unable to make sense of the data, and video will suddenly
Note that the receiver must be manually set to match the BW be lost.
setting of the transmitter. The BER at which this occurs will vary depending on the design
of the MPEG decoder and the location of the errors in the data
D.4.5 BER stream.
When the receiver applies its error corrections to the incoming
data, it counts both the total number of errors it has detected and
the number it cannot correct.
• The Pre-Viterbi BER measures the total number of errors
the FEC algorithm attempted to correct. This BER is
defined as
# Errors Detected / # Bits Received
• The Post-Viterbi BER measures only the errors the FEC

algorithm was not able to correct. This BER is defined as
# Errors Not Corrected / # Bits Received

As signal quality degrades, the Pre-Viterbi BER will increase.
This indicates the System is detecting more errors. However, the
FEC algorithm will be able to correct these errors, and the Post-
Viterbi BER will be maintained at 0. Video and audio will be
undisturbed.
As the signal continues to degrade, the Pre-Viterbi BER will
continue to increase. At some point the FEC algorithms will
reach the limit of errors they can correct. The uncorrected errors
will then appear in the Post-Viterbi BER. These Post-Viterbi
errors are a warning sign, even though the video may still be
acceptable.


E Specifications Threshold (7 GHz): . . . . . . . . . . . . . –86 dBm @ 37 dB video S/N
Field Tilt: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1%
Output Level Adjust: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3dB to –6dB, squelch
This section provides specifications for the STRATA RX System. 1 Vpp @ 4 MHz peak deviation - nominal
1 Vpp @ MHz peak deviation
Note MRC reserves the right to make changes to Baseband Response: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 KHz to 8 MHz +0.5 dB
specifications of products described in this
8 MHz to 12 MHz < 2dB
specification sheet at any time without notice and
without obligation to notify any person of such Audio Channels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demodulation of 4
changes. Independent Subcarriers
Subcarrier input tune range: . . . . . . MHz to 8.59 MHz tunable in
ANALOG AUDIO & VIDEO DEMODULATOR 5 Khz steps (local/serial control)
Level Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0 dBm to –2 dBm) 0 dBm nominal programmable presets
Audio Performance:
Impedance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ohms
Frequency Response: . . . . . . . . . . . . (40 Hz to 15 KHz): ±1.0 dB
Composite Outputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switched / Baseband/video
(40 Hz to 10 KHz): ± 0.5 dB
Video Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vpp (75 ohms) 525 /625 line Threshold: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 % @ 1 KHz (75 KHz deviation)
Return Loss: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >26 dB 2.0 % @ 1 KHz (200KHz deviation)
Plug In Video Low Pass Filters: . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 , 5.0, & 5.5 MHz Signal/Noise: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 dB (min.)
Video Response: . . . . . ±0.25 dB @ within video filter bandwidth Output Impedance: . . . . . . . . . . . 600 ohms balanced/10 K ohms
(selectable)
Video Performance (15 MHz L/C IF Filter): Output Level (adjust): . . . . . . . . . . . +8 dBm – line level – nominal
Signal/Noise: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >68 dB (weighted per RS-250C) (0 dBm to +18 dBm) – local/serial
Signal/Hum: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >63 dB (weighted per RS-250C) Audio Channel Crosstalk: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 dB
Differential Phase: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 degree De-emphasis: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 uS/75 uS , flat
Differential Gain: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1% CODFM DEMODULATION
Chroma/Luminance Gain: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4% IF Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 MHz
Chroma/Luminance Delay: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±20 nS Input Range: . . . . . . . –10 dBm nominal, (–10 dBm to –12 dBm)
Threshold (2 GHz): . . . . . . . . . . . . . –87 dBm @ 37 dB video S/N Bandwidth (Selectable): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Specifications E-1

Threshold: . . . . . . . . . C/N-within 2 dB of ET51 300 744 Standard FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & DISPLAYS
COFDM Acquisition Speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Msec (typical) CONTROLS
Modulation Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM Analog: . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Set Channel/Offset, Set RF Band,
Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVB-ASI, SDI, MPEG Composite Set IF Filter, Set Monitor, Adjust Squelch,
Turn DC Coax Power On/Off
Packet Length: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 bytes
Digital: . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Set Channel/Offset, Set RF Band,
Forward Error Correction (FEC)-Auto Detect: . . . . . . . . . 1/2, 2/3, Set IF Filter, Set Monitor, Set OFDM
3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Bandwidth, Turn Coax Power On/Off
Guard Intervals-Auto Detect: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/32, 1/16,1/8,1/4 DISPLAYS
MPEG DECODER Analog FMR: . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Band, Frequency, Channel, IF
Chroma Profile: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2:2/4:2:0 Filter, Operating Mode, Audio Channel
Line Standard: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526/625 Frequency, Video Deviation, Video Mute,
Audio De-emphasis (On/Off), Error Screen
GOP Structures: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable GOP
Digital: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Band, Frequency, Link Quality,
Horizontal Resolution: . . . . . . . . . . 720, 704, 544, 352 Selectable
Channel, Modulation, Bandwidth, FEC,
Vertical Resolution: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 (625 line), 480 (525 line) Guard Interval, Pre/Post Vertibi, FEC,
Bit rates: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2:0 – 1.5 Mbits – 15 Mbits COFDM Lock/Unlock, Video Output,
4:2:2 – 2.0 Mbits – 50 Mbits Audio Lock/Unlock, Error Screen
Audio Coding: . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG–II layer 2 (ISO/IEC 13818-3)
STRATA RX CONFIGURATOR SOFTWARE MENUS
ISO/MPEG 11172.3 Layer II (MUSICAM)
(RS-232 connection to PC or laptop)
Bit Rates: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 to 448 Kbits/s
Sampling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 KHz and 48 KHz Main: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect to Radio, Load Presets, Save
Presets, Select Module Options, Program
Composite Video Output: . . . . . . . . . NTSC (w/wo pedestal) /PAL
Radio, Upload Radio Settings
WAYSIDE CHANNEL
Radio: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Select Filter (Analog/Digital),
Embedded data channel on MPEG Module (uses connections Squelch Level, Monitor Select (IF/ASI),
via RS-232 port for DCE Data Path)
Supported Data Rates: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200, 2400, 4800, COFDM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COFDM Bandwidth (6,7, 8 MHz)
9600, 19200, 38400

MPEG: . . . . . . . . . NTSC Pedestal (On/Off), Color Bars (On/Off)
Audio Output (Analog/AES-EBU), BISS-1or
BISS-E keys
FMR: . . . . . . . . . . . Preset, Video Deviation (3/4 MHz), Low Pass
Filter (On/Off), Audio Channel Frequency
(4 channels), Select Deemphasis/filtered
Channel Plan: . . . . . Center Frequency, Offset (+/–),Select Band
(2/7 GHz), Clear Channel Plan, Load channel
Plan, Default FCC Plan, Save Channel Plan
STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Specifications E-3


Index C
Channel, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Channels and Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Initial Factory Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Numerics US 12MHz Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
16QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 COFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
32QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 COFDM Bandwidth, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
A COFDM UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Composite Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
AC INPUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Configurator
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . 3-6 About window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
DC OUTPUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
DC OUTPUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 logo box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 alert buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
power LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Chan Plan page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
POWER Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Channel Plan - CLR option button . . . . . . C-27
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Channel Plan - DFLT option button . . . . . C-27
AES/EBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 entering frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
ASI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 File Access - LOAD option button . . . . . . C-26
Audience, Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 File Access - SAVE option button . . . . . . C-26
Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Offset- , Center, and Offset+ frequencies C-25
AUDIO UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 PROG option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
READ option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
B Chan Plan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3, C-24
Band, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Channel Plan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
Bandwidth, COFDM, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Channel plan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Check boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, B-2 check boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
BISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 COFDM Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
BISS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 COFDM page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
BISS-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Bandwidth pull-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Bit Error Ratio, Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Bandwidth selection choices . . . . . . . . . . C-19
BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Preset pedestal bandwidth settings . . . . . C-18
BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Index-1

Radio COFDM Operations - PROG option load a configuration and channel plan from a
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Radio COFDM Operations-READ option load and modify a configuration and channel
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
common operational problems . . . . . . . . . . . C-39 Load and Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42 load individual pages, modify, and save
configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Configurator Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 loading and saving settings to and from files . . C-4
Configurator Operational Problems . . . . . . . C-39 Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 MONITOR OFF option button . . . . . . . . . . C-3
create a new 2 GHz and/or a 7 GHz channel Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3, C-9
plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 CONN option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
create a new channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 General Operations - PROG option
create new STRATA RX System configuration button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9, C-11
and channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 General Operations COM port pull-down
decimal separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Decimal Separator Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . C-42 General Operations option buttons . . . . . C-10
detailed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 LOAD option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
dynamic option button labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
FMR Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 logo box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
FMR page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 Preset pull-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
audio sub-carrier options . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 Radio Operations option buttons . . . . . . . C-10
Low pass (LP) filter settings . . . . . . . . . . C-24 SAVE option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Radio FMR Operations - PROG option STRATA RXU and STRATA RCU
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 configuration option buttons . . . . . . C-10, C-13
Radio FMR Operations - READ option SYSTEM INFORMATION option button . C-12
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 modify a STRATA RX System configuration
Video deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 and channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Front Panel vs. Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 modify an individual Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 modify channel plan from a file . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 modify channel plan in STRATA RX System . 5-47
Graphical User Interface options . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 modify individual system configuration or
Help tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 channel plan pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Installing the Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 Monitor page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27

COFDM tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32 MRC home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Errors page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 new configuration and channel plan . . . . . . . . 5-3
Errors tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33 operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
FM CV Out Monitor page . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28 option buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
MONITOR OFF option button . . . . . . . . . C-28 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
MPEG tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Preset pull-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Radio tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31 PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Status tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Submit option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28 Processor Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Monitor tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3, C-12 prepare, modify, save, or load channel plans . C-7
MONITOR OFF option button . . . . . . . . . C-12 program channel plan into STRATA RX
MONITOR ON button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 System from a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Radio Operations - READ option button . C-13 programming a single page or a single preset C-7
Radio Operations- PROG option button . C-13 Programming an individual Preset . . . . . . . . . . C-8
MPEG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 Progress Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
MPEG page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 progress bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Audio - Output option choices . . . . . . . . . C-22 Pull-down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Audio - Output pull-down menu . . . . . . . . C-22 Radio buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Audio A and Audio B text boxes . . . . . . . C-20 Radio Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Audio output attenuation levels . . . . . . . . C-20 Radio page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Configurator
(BISS) encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 Radio page
Encryption - Type Radio Preset Operations - PROG
pull-down option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
NTSC pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 Radio Preset Operations - READ
NTSC Pedestal check box . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 filter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Preset Color Bars options . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22 Monitor Out choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Program Identifications (PIDs) . . . . . . . . . C-22 Monitor Out radio buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Radio MPEG Operations - PROG option Operation Mode drop-down menu . . . . . . C-16
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 Operation Mode selection choices . . . . . . C-16
Radio MPEG Operations - READ option Preset Name text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 Squelch level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Service Information option . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21

Squelch text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17 Documents
Reading or programming a single . . . . . . . . . . C-8 Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Reading or programming settings for the entire Related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
RS-232 link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 DVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Save an Instrument Configuration File window C-11 E
self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
software error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 ENG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
software page option buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
STRATA RX Configuration Utility window . . . . C-2 ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
STRATA RX Configurator icon . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
system rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 EVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 F
Tabs, Pages and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
tabs, pages, buttons, menus, etc. . . . . . . . . . . C-1 FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 For More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 Frequencies Locked to Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Windows tool bar Frequently Performed Tasks
STRATA RX Monitor Utility option Controlling DC on Coax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13, C-29 Monitoring Bit Error Ratio (BER) . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Working With the Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Monitoring Link Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Configurator Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Monitoring Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Configurator, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 Preparing for Operation
Controls Mobile Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Mounting to the Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
D Portable Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 6-3
Damage in Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Selecting a Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
dBm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Selecting a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
DC on Coax, Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Selecting IF Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
DCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Setting COFDM Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Setting Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Messages, Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting Squelch Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Turning Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Modifications, Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
G Monitor Output, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
MPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
General System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
MRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
MRC Technical Support
GI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 7-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
MRC Tripod
H Dovetail Adapter Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-9
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Fixed Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
I Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Quick Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Universal Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
IF Filter, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Initial N
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 N/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Inspection NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Installing Configurator software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 NOT ON CHANNEL message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
L Null modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 O
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 OFDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Link Quality Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Demodulator-Only Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
LQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Output, Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
M P
MaxRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Menu Maps, Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Cable Assemblies Monitor Link Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
DC Branched Wire Harness Assembly . . . . . . 6-14 Monitor Receive Carrier Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
DC to DC Wire Harness Assembly . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power, Turning On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 STRATA RX System channel plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Preset STRATA RX System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 System
Q Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
R Configurations, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
RCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Options
RF NOT FOUND message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Demodulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
S Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Screens Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Screen Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 T
SNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, B-6 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 7-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 TRANSPORT UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Squelch Level, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Troubleshooting
STRATA ACU Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
portable deployment applications . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
standalone TXU or TCU operations . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Messages on Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
STRATA Remote Control Panel Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . 3-7 Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
STRATA RX Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 U
Configurator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
STRATA RX Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Analog or digital operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

V
VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
VIDEO UNLOCKED message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
W
Warranty Information
Products Manufactured By Others . . . . Notices-iii
Wayside channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Wayside Data
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21


Strata RX Tech Ref Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Strata RX Tech Ref Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Strata RX Tech Ref Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STRATA RX System

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices i

CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge. Possible

On-Line Viewing -OR-

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices ii

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices iii

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Notices iv

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Contents Contents-1

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Contents Contents-2

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Contents Contents-3

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Contents Contents-4

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-1

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-2

Telephone: 978-671-5929 Return the entire unit for factory repair.

When contacting Technical Support, please have the following

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-3

Or, you can E-mail our Technical Support team at:

Be sure to tell us what product you’re writing about, and which

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Introduction 1-4

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-1

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-2

Antenna Options The STRATA RX is fully compatible with

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-3

DC Power (+10.5 V to +36 V)

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-4

• STRATA ACU If your RXU or RCU contains a digital demodulator, it provides

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-5

Figure 2-3: STRATA ACU

The unit allows selection of either the analog or digital operating

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-6

SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT RX RXU PWR/RS-485

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-7

SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

Analog Composite Video

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-8

SYSTEM RXU RCU SYSTEM

RS-232 POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO

GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-9

SYSTEM RXU SYSTEM

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-10

SYSTEM RXU RCU SYSTEM

RS-232 POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO

GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-11

SYSTEM RXU RCU SYSTEM

RS-232 POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO

GEN SIGNAL MON. GEN

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-12

SYSTEM RCU SYSTEM

POWER/RS-485 SIGNAL IN AUDIO

SIGNAL MON. GEN

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-13

STRATA RX Operator’s Guide/Tech Ref Manual Product Description 2-14

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Routine Operation 3-1

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Routine Operation 3-2

STRATA RX Technical Reference Manual Routine Operation 3-3

RS-232 Connector 3-4